October 30, 2017 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
CIVIL ENGINEER. Impact Engineering & Planning, PLC .. required by all, and what is shown on one Drawing shall be as&...
WILL ROGERS DOWNS RENOVATION
CHEROKEE NATION ENTERTAINMENT 20900 S. 4200 Road Claremore, Oklahoma 74019
Construction Documents April 4, 2016
ARCHITECT: TRI-ARCH PLC 618 East Third Street Tulsa, Oklahoma 74120
DOCUMENT 000002 PROJECT DIRECTORY WILL ROGERS DOWNS RENOVATION CHEROKEE NATION ENTERTAINMENT 20900 SOUTH 4200 ROAD CLAREMORE, OKLAHOMA 74019 ARCHITECT Tri-Arch PLC 618 East Third Street Tulsa, Oklahoma 74120 Contact: Scott Vrooman Contact: Tony Popp Telephone: (918) 743.2724 FAX: (918).743.2725
[email protected] [email protected] MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER hp engineering , inc. 1836 South Baltimore Ave. Suite B Tulsa, OK 74119 Contact: Brandon Pinkerton Contact: Kory Zehr 539.664.4618 www hpengineeringinc.com FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT HESMAN Group LLC www.hesmangroup.com 7645 E. 63rd St. Suite 201 Tulsa, OK 74133-1256 918-935-5036 Scott Heskett
[email protected] CIVIL ENGINEER Impact Engineering & Planning, PLC www.impact-eng.net 109 N. Birch St, Suite 200 Owasso, OK 74055 918-376-4294 Kevin Vanover
[email protected] END OF DOCUMENT 000002
PROJECT DIRECTORY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
000002 - 1
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
DOCUMENT 000003 TABLE OF CONTENTS WILL ROGERS DOWNS RENOVATION CHEROKEE NATION ENTERTAINMENT 20900 SOUTH 4200 ROAD CLAREMORE, OKLAHOMA 74019 April 4, 2016 INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document Document Document Section
000001 000002 000003 000107
Project Title Page Project Directory Table of Contents Seals Page - Architect
000001 000002 000003 000107
-
01 01 05 01
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Section Section
006000 007300
Project Forms Supplementary Conditions
006000 - 02 007300 - 05
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
011000 012300 012500 012600 012900 013100 013200 013300 014000 015000 016000 017300 017700 017823 017839 017900
Summary Alternates Substitution Procedures Contract Modification Procedures Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution Closeout Procedures Operation and Maintenance Data Project Record Documents Demonstration and Training
011000 012300 012500 012600 012900 013100 013200 013300 014000 015000 016000 017300 017700 017823 017839 017900
-
04 02 04 02 05 10 06 09 07 06 05 06 05 07 04 04
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section
024119
Selective Demolition
TABLE OF CONTENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 06 000003 - 1 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section Section Section
033013 033053 033543
Concrete Treatments Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Polished Concrete and Floor Finish System
033013 - 04 033053 - 09 033543 - 05
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY Section
044313
Adhered Stone Masonry Veneer
044313 - 08
Metal Fabrications Pipe and Tube Railings
055000 - 06 055213 - 06
DIVISION 05 - METALS Section Section
055000 055213
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Section Section Section Section
061053 062013 064023 064116
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Exterior Finish Carpentry Interior Finish Carpentry Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets
061053 062013 064023 064116
-
04 02 09 08
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section Section Section
072413 074113 079200
Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (E.I.F.S) Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels Joint Sealants
072413 - 07 074113 - 08 079200 - 08
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Section Section Section Section Section Section
081113 081416 083323 087100 087101 088000
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Overhead Coiling Doors Door Hardware Door Hardware Schedule Glazing
081113 081416 083323 087100 087101 088000
-
07 03 04 04
Non-Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Tiling Acoustical Panel Ceilings
092216 092900 093000 095113
-
06 08 08 06
06
DIVISION 09- FINISHES Section Section Section Section
092216 092900 093000 095113
TABLE OF CONTENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
000003 - 2 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
096513 096519 096723 096813 097200 097800 099113 099123 099300
Resilient Base and Accessories Resilient Tile Flooring Resinous Flooring Tile Carpeting Wall Coverings Wall Panels Exterior Painting Interior Painting Staining and Transparent Finishes
096513 096519 096723 096813 097200 097800 099113 099123 099300
-
05 05 07 04 04 05 05 10 08
101423 102113 102600 104413 104416
-
02 04 03 04 03
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section Section Section Section Section
101423 102113 102600 104413 104416
Panel Signage Toilet Compartments Wall and Door Protection Fire Extinguisher Cabinets Fire Extinguishers
DIVISION 11 - FURNISHINGS Section
114000
Foodservice Equipment
114000 - 53
DIVISION 12 - EQUIPMENT Section
123661
Simulated Stone Surfaces
123661 - 03
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION Section Section Section
210517 210518 211313
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping Escutcheons for Fire-Supression Piping Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
210517 - 04 210518 - 02 211313 - 16
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section Section Section Section Section Section
220513 220517 220518 220519 220523 220529
Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
TABLE OF CONTENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
220513 220517 220518 220519 220523 220529
-
03 04 02 06 09 08
000003 - 3 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
220553 220719 221116 221119 221316 221319 221413 221423
Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Piping Insulation Domestic Water Piping Domestic Water Piping Specialties Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Sanitary Waste and Vent Specialties Facility Storm Drainage Piping Storm Drainage Piping Specialties
220553 220719 221116 221119 221316 221319 221413 221423
-
06 18 12 09 11 07 10 04
230514 230516 230517 230518 230519 230523 230529 230548 230553 230593 230713 230716 230719 231123 232113 232116 232500 233113 233300 233713 233723
-
12 05 04 03 06 09 08 06 03 13 14 15 11 15 12 07 08 13 13 04 04
260519 260526 260529 260533 260536 260544 260553 260923 260926
-
05 06 06 11 07 05 08 08 07
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
230514 230516 230517 230518 230519 230523 230529 230548 230553 230593 230713 230716 230719 231123 232113 232116 232500 233113 233300 233713 233723
Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping Escutcheons for HVAC Piping Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Duct Insulation HVAC Equipment Insulation HVAC Piping Insulation Facility Natural-Gas Piping Hydronic Piping Hydronic Piping Specialties HVAC Water Treatment Metal Ducts Air Duct Accessories Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles HVAC Gravity Ventilators
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
260519 260526 260529 260533 260536 260544 260553 260923 260926
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Pinding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Sysstems Cable Trays for Electrical Systems Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Identification for Electrical Systems Lighting Control Devices Lighting Control Panelboards
TABLE OF CONTENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
000003 - 4 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section
262300 262413 262416 262726 262813 262816 265100
Low-Voltage Switchgear Switchboards Panelboards Wiring Devices Fuses Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Interior Lighting
262300 262413 262416 262726 262813 262816 265100
-
09 10 07 08 02 07 08
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS (Not Used) Section
270536
Low-Voltage Specifications
270536 - 04
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (Not Used) DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK - To be issued under separate package DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS - To be issued under separate package DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES - To be issued under separate package
END OF DOCUMENT 000003
TABLE OF CONTENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
000003 - 5 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
SECTION 000107 SEALS PAGES PROJECT:
WILL ROGERS DOWNS RENOVATION CHEROKEE NATION ENTERTAINMENT, LLC 20900 S. 4200 ROAD CLAREMORE, OKLAHOMA 74019
ARCHITECT OF RECORD Scott Weston Vrooman AIA Tri-Arch, LLC 618 East Third Street Tulsa, OK 74120 Registration No. 5378
Architect of Record
WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
Date
000107 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
DOCUMENT 006000 PROJECT FORMS 1.1
FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS A.
The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project: 1.
AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum." a.
2. 3. 1.2
The General Conditions for Project are AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction."
The General Conditions are incorporated by reference. The Supplementary Conditions for Project are incorporated are separately prepared and included in the Project Manual.
ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS A.
Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General Requirements.
B.
Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects; http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm;
[email protected]; (800) 9427732.
C.
Preconstruction Forms: 1. 2.
D.
Information and Modification Forms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond." Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715, "Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."
Form for Requests for Information (RFIs): AIA Document G716, "Request for Information (RFI)," or other form approved by the Architect. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709, "Work Changes Proposal Request." Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order." Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work: AIA Document G707, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive."
Payment Forms: 1.
Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet."
WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
006000 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2. 3. 4. 5.
Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for Payment and Continuation Sheet." Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Release of Liens." Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." END OF DOCUMENT 006000
WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
006000 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify AIA Document A201-2007, “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” 2007 edition. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 Change the second sentence to read: “The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all, and what is shown on one Drawing shall be as binding as if shown on all Drawings.” Add the following subparagraphs 1.2.2 and 1.2.3 to paragraph 1.2: 1.2.2 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations shall be based on the following priorities: 1. The Agreement. 2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 3. The Supplementary Conditions. 4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5. Division 01 of the Specifications. 6. Drawings and Division 02-33 of the Specifications. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies between Drawings and Divisions 02-33 of the Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by Addendum, the Architect will determine which takes precedence in accordance with Section 4.2.12. 7. Alternates in the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 If there is a conflict between any Drawings, or Drawings and Specifications, the Contractor shall notify the Architect or Engineer in writing of the conflict, and request clarification in writing by the Architect or Engineer prior to bidding. If such clarification is not sought, or, if sought, is not received in a timely manner prior to bidding, the Contractor shall use the most expensive or best quality product or method. Failure to seek clarification of any conflict in the documents will not relieve the Contractor from providing in his price an amount to perform the Work. ARTICLE 3 3.2
CONTRACTOR
REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
Change Section 3.2.2 as follows: In the second sentence change the phrase “request for information” to “request for interpretation”. Change Section 3.2.3 as follows: In the first sentence change the phrase “request for information” to “request for interpretation”.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
007300 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
Delete the third and fourth sentences of Section 3.2.4 and substitute the following sentence: 3.2.4 “If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or the Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Document, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.” Add the following Subsection 3.2.5 to Section 3.2: 3.2.5 The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor’s requests for interpretation, where such information was available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison to the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation. Add the following Section 3.2.6 to Section 3.2: 3.2.6 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Section 3.12. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following subparagraphs 3.4.2.1 and 3.4.2.2 to paragraph 3.4.2: 3.4.2.1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Division 01 Specification Section “Product Requirements.” 3.4.2.2 By making requests of substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.2.1 above, the Contractor: .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect’s redesign costs, and waives all claims of additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 3.6
TAXES
Modify Paragraph 3.6 to read as follows: The Owner is a nonprofit entity, and is therefore exempt from sales and use taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor. Add the following Section 3.6.1 to Section 3.6: 3.6.1 The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the payment of all contributions and payroll taxes (state and federal) as to all subcontractors and employees engaged in the performance of work pursuant hereto, and further agrees to check and meet all requirements that might be specified under
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
007300 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
regulations of the administrative official or board charged with the enforcement of any state or federal act on the subject referred to. Contractor agrees to furnish the Owner, upon request, a certificate or other evidence of compliance therewith. 3.6.2 PROVIDE BREAKOUT PRICING IN BID FOR TAXES ON MATERIALS INVOICED IN AMOUNTS OVER $500 OR MORE FOR OPTIONAL CONSIDERATION, AS FOLLOWS: 3.6.2.1 For any materials supplied by the Contractor with an invoice of over $500.00, the Contractor may pass the invoice directly to the Owner and the Owner will directly pay the invoiced amount using the Owner’s tax-free status. The Contractor shall then include any Owner-paid invoice amounts in the Application for Payment a previously paid amounts. 3.6.2.2 For invoices up to an including $500.00, the Contractor shall purchase the materials directly and pay any applicable taxes. Following this method, materials procured in amounts over $500.00 will be tax free, however, the Contractor is responsible for procuring the material and including the cost of the material in their bid. Impact on the Project Schedule to be determined by the Owner and the successful bidder and taxation strategy to be determined post-bid. 3.10
CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Delete subparagraph 3.10.3 and substitute the following: 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in Accordance with the Contractor’s generated and approved construction schedule within the contract time specified. ARTICLE 7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES Delete subparagraph 7.3.7.5 and substitute the following: 7.3.7.5 Additional costs of added supervision and field office personnel only if the increased scope of Work requires added personnel, and only with the approval of the Owner. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add the following subparagraph 8.2.4 to paragraph 8.2: 8.2.4 Substantial Completions shall be achieved within the time stipulated in the Contract, and Final Completion within 30 days thereafter. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 Add the following sentence at the end of subparagraph 9.3.1: “The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, latest edition, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet, latest edition. Add the following subparagraph 9.3.1.1 to paragraph 9.3.1: 9.3.1.1 The Owner shall pay ninety (90) percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments, and then increased to ninety-five (95) percent of the amount due the Contractor upon completion of 50 percent of the Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
007300 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add the following subparagraph 9.8.6 to Article 9.8: 9.8.6 Obtain applicable regulatory entity and consultant-based inspections and certificates of Substantial Completion. Construction is not on Trust Land. No local municipal construction permit is required. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE Add the following subparagraphs to paragraph 11.1: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the coverages and limits of liability specified below, or greater if required by law: 1.
Worker's Compensation: (a) State of Oklahoma: (b) Applicable Federal: (c) Employer's Liability:
2.
Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): (a) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 (b) Personal Injury Limit $1,000,000
3.
Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles) (a) Combined Single Limit of Liability $1,000,000
5.
Umbrella Excess Liability over Primary Insurance: (a) Each Occurrence $1,000,000
Statutory Statutory $500,000 per Accident $500,000 per Disease, Policy Limit $500,000 per Disease, Each Employee
11.1.3 Add the following Sentence to subparagraph 11.1.3: “If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD Form 25S will be acceptable.” Add the following subparagraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.6 to paragraph 11.1: 11.1.4 The maintenance of insurance by the Contractor and the limits of coverage required shall in no way limit or affect the extent of the Contractor’s Liability. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Modify the first sentence of subparagraph 11.3.1 as follows: Delete the words “Unless otherwise provided by the Owner”, and substitute “The Contractor”. Add the following sentences to the end of subparagraph 11.3.1:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
007300 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
“The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.” 11.3.1.2
Delete subparagraph 11.3.1.2.
11.3.1.3
Delete subparagraph 11.3.1.3.
Add the following subparagraph 11.3.1.5 and 11.3.1.6 to paragraph 11.3.1: 11.3.1.5 Premiums for Contractor’s insurance are reimbursable with the exception of any unusual or additional premiums incurred due to extended time required to complete Work which exceeds all Owner-approved time extensions. 11.3.1.6 The Cost of Premiums for Work not completed will not be chargeable to the Owner. 11.3.6 Delete subparagraph 11.3.6 and substitute the following: 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner and the Architect one certificate of insurance stating limits of coverage of this Property Insurance coverage, naming endorsements specifically related to the Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor, the Owner, and the Architect. Add the following Article 16: END OF SECTION 007300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
007300 - 5 September 25, 2015 Construction Documents
SECTION 011000 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.2
Work covered by the Contract Documents. Type of the Contract. Work phases. Work under other contracts. Products ordered in advance. Owner-furnished products. Use of premises. Owner's occupancy requirements. Work restrictions. Specification formats and conventions.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.
Project Identification: Will Rogers Downs Renovation.
B.
Project Description: Renovation of existing Will Rogers Downs racetrack grandstand public and service areas.
C.
Owner: Cherokee Nation Entertainment LLC; 20900 S. 4200 Road, Claremore, OK 74019
D.
Architect: Tri-Arch, 618 East Third Street, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74120; Telephone: 918-743-2724. 1.
1.3
Contact: Scott Vrooman (
[email protected]) or Tony Popp (
[email protected]) .
TYPE OF CONTRACT A.
1.4
Project will be constructed under a general contract for construction, with contract awarded after receipt of competitive bids from a select list of Contractors. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
No work under other contracts is anticipated.
SUMMARY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
011000 - 1
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
1.5
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.
Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B. 1.6
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
Owner-Furnished Products: Refer to Specialty Schedule on Drawings. USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as defined by phasing requirements in order to keep hospital functions ongoing, including use of Project site, during construction period. 1. 2.
Work will be performed in phases as described on the Drawings, and in other sections of this Project Manual. Cooperate with the Owner in establishing times and methods of work so as not to adversely affect hotel functions. Cooperate with the Owner in establishing dates for partial occupancy or changeover between completed portions of the Work and work to be commenced in new phases. Owner reserves the right, in consultation with the Architect and contractor to modify phasing and timing requirements to suit hospital operations.
SUMMARY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
011000 - 2
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Perform work in phases in accordance with Owner’s need to maintain fully functional and accessible hospital operations. 1. 2.
Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated on the Drawings. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the existing hospital and the adjacent health medical office building premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. b.
1.7
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
WORK RESTRICTIONS A.
1.8
Comply with Owner’s security requirements and time constraints for time and location of worker entry and exit, removal of demolition materials and construction waste, and delivery of new material and equipment. SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1.
2. B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
SUMMARY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
011000 - 3
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
011000 - 4
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. 2.
1.3
Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included on the Drawings, Sheet G000. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012300 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A.
Refer to the Drawings for Schedule and description of alternate(s). END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012300 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. 2.
1.3
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
SUBMITTALS A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. b. c.
d. e. f. g.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012500 - 1
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
h. i. j.
k. l. m.
2.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven Insert number days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.
1.4
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project . Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.5
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012500 - 2
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
B.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a.
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012500 - 3
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
j.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012500 - 4
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.
1.3
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. 2.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within time specified in Proposal Request, or not to exceed 20 days if not otherwise specified after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. b. c. d.
B.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012600 - 1
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
C. 1.4
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. 1.5
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012600 - 2
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.3
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. b. c.
2. B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. Submittals Schedule. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. b.
Project name and location. Name of Architect.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012900 - 1
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
c. d. e. 2. 3.
Architect's project number. Contractor's name and address. Date of submittal.
Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Related Specification Section or Division. Description of the Work. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. Dollar value. 1)
4.
5. 6.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a.
7. 8.
9.
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012900 - 2
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
10.
1.4
Schedule of Values Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 15th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 15 days before the date for each progress payment.
D.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. 2.
F.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1.
G.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. 2.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012900 - 3
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
3. 4.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
H.
Construction Schedule: Submit an updated Construction Schedule at regular intervals a part of the Application for Payment submittal.
I.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
J.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. 2.
K.
List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule. Products list. Schedule of unit prices. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. List of Contractor's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. Report of preconstruction conference. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. 2. 3.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012900 - 4
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
012900 - 5
April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Coordination Drawings. Administrative and supervisory personnel. Project meetings. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B.
Each subcontractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific subcontractor.
C.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field‐engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.3
RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.
2. 3.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components with other subcontractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 1 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
4.
Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
D.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1.
1.4
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Preinstallation conferences. Project closeout activities. Startup and adjustment of systems. Project closeout activities.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.
SUBMITTALS A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1.
Content: Project‐specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. Indicate required installation sequences. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 2 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. 3.
Sheet Size: At least 8‐1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy Insert number copies. a.
4.
B.
Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 Insert number days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.
1.5
Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.
1.6
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MEETINGS A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2. 3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times at least 48 hours in advance. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 3 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect . Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v.
3. C.
Tentative construction schedule. Phasing. Critical work sequencing and long‐lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFIs. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Preparation of Record Documents. Use of the premises. Work restrictions. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Construction waste management and recycling. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security. Progress cleaning. Working hours.
Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators including, but not limited to those trades listed below, involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates at least 48 hours in advance.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 4 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. 2. 3.
Foundation preparation. Grading. Cast‐in‐place concrete Structural steel. Cold‐formed metal framing (exterior studwork). Sheathing and weather barrier. Aluminum‐framed entrances and storefronts (exterior and interior) and aluminum curtain wall systems. Automatic entrance doors (sliding and swinging) Membrane roofing and roofing specialties. Glazing and sealant. Non‐loadbearing steel framing (interior studwork) and drywall. Hollow metal doors and frames (interior). Gypsum board installation and finishing. Painting (exterior and interior) and wall coverings. Suspended acoustical panel ceilings and gypsum board, and other ceiling materials. Tiling. Elevators. Plumbing. Fire suppression system. Mechanical. Electrical. Security systems. Paving. Site irrigation and planting.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: The Contract Documents. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.
Options. Related RFIs. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Submittals. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 5 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
4. 5. 6.
D.
o. Temporary facilities and controls. p. Space and access limitations. q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. r. Testing and inspecting requirements. s. Installation procedures. t. Coordination with other work. u. Required performance results. v. Protection of adjacent work. w. Protection of construction and personnel. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals appropriate to the progress of the Work. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1)
b.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4)
Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 6 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 3. 4.
Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a.
E.
Off‐site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. Field observations. RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. Pending claims and disputes. Documentation of information for payment requests.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, the Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 7 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
b.
c.
Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13)
3.
1.7
Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off‐site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A.
Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. 2.
B.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Project name. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 8 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
9. 10. 11.
Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. Contractor's signature. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a.
Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.
C.
Software‐Generated RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3.
Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
F.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: : 1.
Project name.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 9 April 4, 2016
Construction Documents
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. Date Architect's response was received. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013100 ‐ 10 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Contractor's construction schedule. Construction schedule updating reports. Daily construction reports. Site condition reports.
DEFINITIONS A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. 2. 3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1.
1.3
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in one of the following formats: 1. 2. 3.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. PDF electronic file. Two paper copies.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.
D.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
F.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. 2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. 1.
B.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. 2.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3. 4. 5. 6. C.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. 2. 3.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
4. 5.
Coordination with existing construction. Limitations of continued occupancies. Uninterruptible services. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. Use of premises restrictions. Provisions for future construction. Seasonal variations. Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. Other Constraints.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
Unresolved issues. Unanswered Requests for Information. Rejected or unreturned submittals. Notations on returned submittals. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
G. 2.2
Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1.
C.
For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. 1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2. 3.
Preparation and processing of submittals. Mobilization and demobilization. Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. Testing. Punch list and final completion. Activities occurring following final completion.
Critical Activities: Identify critical activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
D.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
E.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. F.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.3
Description of activity. Main events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
B.
List of subcontractors at Project site. List of separate contractors at Project site. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. Accidents. Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Change Orders received and implemented. Change Directives received and implemented. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups. Partial completions and occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-toknow schedule responsibility. 1. 2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013200 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.2
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. b.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a.
C.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Paper Submittals: identification. 1. 2. 3.
Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
Project name. Date. Name of Architect. Name of Construction Manager. Name of Contractor. Name of subcontractor. Name of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1)
j. k.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
l. m. 4.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a.
5.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: following information: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19)
Provide locations on form for the
Project name. Date. Destination (To:). Source (From:). Name and address of Architect. Name of Construction Manager. Name of Contractor. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. Category and type of submittal. Submittal purpose and description. Specification Section number and title. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Indication of full or partial submittal. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Remarks. Signature of transmitter.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. 2. 3.
Note date and content of previous submittal. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a.
2. 3. 4.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two (original markup and one Xerox) copies. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. b.
B.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. 2. 3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Manufacturer's product specifications. Standard color charts. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of coordination requirements. Availability and delivery time information.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
4.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. b. c. d.
5. 6.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. Submit Product Data in the following format: a.
C.
Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies (one original markup and one Xerox).
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2. 3.
Identification of products. Schedules. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a.
D.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return two copies (one original markup and one Xerox).
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. 2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d.
Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3. 4.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. b.
5.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a.
2.2
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
General: Sections. 1. 2.
3.
Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
B.
Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
D.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.
E.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
H.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
I.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
J.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
K.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
L.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
M.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
N.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
O.
Resubmitted Shop Drawings: Resubmitted shop drawings which have been stamped “Approved” or “Approved As Noted- No Resubmission Required” and which have not had substantial and material changes made for cause, such as incorporating a request for substitution, will be handled by the Architect as Informational Submittals and no review will be taken nor submittal returned to Contractor.
2.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
Comply with requirements
013300 - 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2.4
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1.
B.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. action, as follows: 1.
"Approved": Final Unrestricted Release. Where submittals are marked "Approved", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 8 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2.
3.
"Approved as Corrected": Final-But-Restricted Release. When submittals are marked "Approved as Corrected", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. "Revise and Resubmit": Returned for Resubmittal. When submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a.
4.
Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit," to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
"Not Approved": When submittal is marked "Not Approved," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Product Shall Not Be Used. a.
Do not permit submittals marked "Not Approved," to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1.
Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal.
E.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
F.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
013300 - 9 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
D.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
E.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
G.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1.
I.
1.3
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. 2.
1.5
Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the windforce-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. B.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
1.6
Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F.
Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
G.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a.
5. 6. 1.7
Allow five days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a.
2.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3. 4. 5.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
C.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
E.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.
1.8
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B. 3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted. Description of the Work tested or inspected. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
014000 - 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.2
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
USE CHARGES A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C.
Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES A.
Field Office: Provide a temporary facility to meet needs of construction personnel, accommodate storage of files and documents, accommodated Project meetings, and base communications equipment, unless Owner provides a space within existing facility for such use. Keep office clean and orderly.
B.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.2
EQUIPMENT A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. 2.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project and where indicated by the Owner to adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A.
Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
B.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel, unless Owner grants permission to use existing facilities without disturbing ongoing operations and occupants; keep facilities clean.
C.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
D.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. 2.
E.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1.
F.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 1.
2. 3.3
Connect to Owner’s electrical distribution system at location approved by Owner. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including police and fire departments, ambulance service, contractor's home office, contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number, Architect's office, Engineers' offices, Owner's office, Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.
General: Comply with the following: 1.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C.
Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing at location directed by Owner.
D.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Place in location directed by Owner. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
C.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
D.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1.
Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
E.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. 2. 3.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3.5
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A.
Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. 2.
3.6
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
015000 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.2
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
DEFINITIONS A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.3
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
016000 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b. B. 1.4
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
016000 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.6
PRODUCT WARRANTIES A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. 2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
016000 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2.
3.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Products: a.
b.
4.
Manufacturers: a.
b.
5.
C.
2.2
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
016000 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
016000 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 017300 EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.2
Construction layout. Installation of the Work. Cutting and patching. Progress cleaning. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures” for recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1.
2. 3.
4.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. 1. 2.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1.
C. 3.2
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, water-service piping; electrical services, and other utilities. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before fixture installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A.
3.4
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. 2. 3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: considered hazardous.
3.5
Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. 2.
H. 3.6
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Enforce
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2.
Remove liquid spills promptly. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
C.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
D.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
E.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
F.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.
G.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
H.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
I.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017300 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.2
Substantial Completion procedures. Final completion procedures. Warranties. Final cleaning. Repair of the Work.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017700 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. 2.
1.6
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017700 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2.
3. 4. 5. B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.
1.7
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A.
1.8
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017700 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FINAL CLEANING A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. b. c. d. e. f.
3.2
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
REPAIR OF THE WORK A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017700 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a.
2.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017700 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2
Operation and maintenance documentation directory. Emergency manuals. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. Product maintenance manuals. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. 2.
B.
Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. b.
2. C.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.
Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Title page. Table of contents. Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Date of submittal. Name and contact information for Contractor. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. Name and contact information for Architect. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
E.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
F.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. 2.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. G.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a.
2.
3. 4.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. b.
2.2
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Type of emergency. Emergency instructions. Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Fire. Flood. Gas leak. Water leak.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
5. 6. 7. 8.
Power failure. Water outage. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3
Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Operating procedures. Operating logs. Wiring diagrams. Control diagrams. Piped system diagrams. Precautions against improper use. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. Manufacturer's name. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Engineering data and tests. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.4
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern, and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the
Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. Repair instructions.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F. 2.5
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Test and inspection instructions. Troubleshooting guide. Precautions against improper maintenance. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.
F.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.
Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017823 - 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Record Drawings. Record Specifications. Record Product Data.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a.
Initial Submittal: 1) 2) 3) 4)
b.
Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set(s) of file prints. Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
Final Submittal: 1) 2)
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of prints. Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017839 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. B.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. 2.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017839 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3. 4.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. Identification: As follows: a. b. c. d. e.
2.2
Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of Architect. Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B. 2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. 2. 3.
B. 2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as [annotated PDF electronic file] [paper copy] [scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data]. MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017839 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as [PDF electronic file] [paper copy] [scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals].
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017839 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Demonstration and training video recordings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1.
1.3
Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1.
1.4
At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.
C.
Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017900 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.5
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
3.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Regulatory requirements. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves.
Emergency manuals. Operations manuals. Maintenance manuals. Project record documents. Identification systems. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. b. c. d.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017900 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
e. f. 4.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
5.
Diagnostic instructions. Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
8.
Alignments. Checking adjustments. Noise and vibration adjustments. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. b.
7.
Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Control sequences. Safety procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Operating procedures for emergencies. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following: a. b. c. d.
6.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Procedures for routine cleaning Procedures for preventive maintenance. Procedures for routine maintenance. Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Diagnosis instructions. Repair instructions. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Instructions for identifying parts and components. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017900 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." INSTRUCTION
A.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
C.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
D.
Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A.
General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1.
At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.
B.
Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect.
C.
Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while dubbing audio narration or off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.
D.
Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
017900 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
DEFINITIONS A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.4
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
C.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. 2.
E.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. 2.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
F.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.
1.8
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D.
Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or preconstruction videotapes. 1.
3.2
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1.
B.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. 2. 3.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. C. 3.3
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2. 3.
4. 5. B.
Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
3.5
Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6
CLEANING A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
024119 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 033013 CONCRETE TREATMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Concrete sealer. Concrete stain.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033520 “Polished Concrete and Floor Finish System” for polishing stained concrete floors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Delivery materials to Project site n manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. Keep from freezing.
C.
Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Do not apply sealer when concrete or air temperatures are below 40 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONCRETE SEALER A.
Available Products/Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Concrete Sealer:
CONCRETE TREATMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033013 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. c. 2.
Water-Based Transparent Concrete Stain:
a. b. c. 3.
Euclid Chemical Company, The; (New concrete); “Diamond Clear,” L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; “Dress & Seal,” Dayton-Superior Corporation; “Safe Seal (J-24),”
Basis-of-Design Product: Butterfield Color. Color indicated in Finish Legend, or selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Other Available Manufacturers: Other manufacturers will be considered if request with product name and supporting data is submitted to Architect for approval to bid at least seven days prior to bid date. Colors: Indicated in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
Water-Based Transparent Concrete Stain Prewash/Preparation: a.
Basis-of-Design Product: Butterfield Color; “CHO Cleaner.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine surfaces to receive concrete sealers and stains. Surfaces must be free of standing water, and clean and dry. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. 1.
3.2
Begin surface preparations only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and instructions.
B.
New Concrete: Cure concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as specified in Division 03 Section “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.”
C.
Existing Cured or Aged Concrete: Should contractor elect to let concrete cure and delay installation of concrete treatments, ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of coatings and contaminants. 1.
D.
Thoroughly clean aged concrete by pressure washing with strong alkaline detergent to remove dirt, waxes, oils, and similar buildup.
Preparation for Concrete Stain: Prepare concrete according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Ensure the slab is free of liquid release agents, powder release agents, curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, and other contaminants. Sand hard-troweled concrete, self-leveling
CONCRETE TREATMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033013 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
overlays or similar dense surfaces by grinding with a rotary sander bearing a 60 to 80 grit mesh sanding screen. Do not overgrind and expose aggregate. Once concrete is clean, sound, and contaminant free, pre-wash with manufacturer’s approved cleaning solution using spray application and scrubbing with clean bristle brush or rotary scrubbing machine. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry on concrete surface. After washing, neutralize the surface by scrubbing and washing with a solution of 1 lb. of sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and 5 gallons of water. Thoroughly remove residues by flushing with clean water and wet vacuuming. Do not clean using muratic acid. Allow to thoroughly dry before applying stain. 3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply concrete sealers to concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B.
Application of Sealer Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing compound to concrete, either hardened or untreated, by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written recommendations. Spraying may be by hand held “pump up” sprayer or airless industrial sprayer. Use short-napped solvent-resistant sleeve when applying by roller.
C.
Apply one coat to trowelled surfaces. Apply two coats if concrete surface is porous or worn.
D.
Application of Water-Based Transparent Concrete Stain:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
Do not apply stains when substrate or ambient air temperatures are lower than 50 deg F or higher than 100 deg F and relative humidity is greater than 85 percent or when temperatures are expected to exceed either maximum within 72 hours after application. Cover and protect adjacent finished and unfinished surfaces with plastic sheeting during mixing and application. Apply stain mixture with a high-volume, low-pressure sprayer (not a hand sprayer). Spray evenly over the prepared surface in a random or circular motion. For large areas, use an airless sprayer with a 0.011 tip. Apply additional coat(s) if concrete is very porous, or to achieve desired coloration and density. Apply until rejection of material by substrate, which is observable by material appearing to remain wet for longer than 1 minute. Do not allow material to puddle and dry on the surface or in joints. Redistribute or wipe up excess material with clean cloths while material is still wet. Do not walk on dry stained surface for 8 hours after final application. Protect surface from water or other liquids for 36 hours. Seal cured stained surfaces with sealer recommended and approved by stain manufacturer. Do not apply sealer if the tested moisture vapor emission rate is in excess of 3.75 lb./1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. If floor will be subject to wetting and a non-slip additive has not been applied, apply non-slip material specified in Section 093000 “Tiling.”
CONCRETE TREATMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033013 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.3
APPLICATION OF CONCRETE SEALERS A.
Apply concrete sealers to concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B.
Application of Sealer Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing compound to concrete, either hardened or untreated, by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written recommendations. Spraying may be by hand held “pump up” sprayer or airless industrial sprayer. Use short-napped solvent-resistant sleeve when applying by roller.
C.
Apply one coat to troweled surfaces. Apply two coats if concrete surface is porous or worn.
3.5
PROTECTION A.
Protect horizontal surfaces from traffic and incidental damage until sealer has cured. END OF SECTION 033013
CONCRETE TREATMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033013 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 033053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following Work: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Trenching fill. New concrete slabs. Concrete countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Other Action Submittal: 1.
1.3
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing readymixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B.
Comply with the following sections of ACI 301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
"General Requirements." "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." "Concrete Mixtures." "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."
Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORMWORK A.
2.2
Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
C.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
D.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
E.
Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A 706, Grade 36, deformed.
2.3
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.
2.4
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Supplement with the following: a.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 1.
C. 2.5
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: None permitted or required.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.6
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
RELATED MATERIALS A.
Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A, with a perm rating of not less than 0.03. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1.
Available Products: a. b. c.
Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 10. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils.
B.
Drainage Course/Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve, unless noted on the drawings.
C.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
D.
Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
E.
Bonding Agent: butadiene.
F.
Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1.
2.7
ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
CURING MATERIALS A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Non-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 156. or dissipating resin curing compound with fugitive dispersing red dye. Use of membrane-forming/retaining curing compounds is not permitted.
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be included in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2.8
Unitex; Cure and Chemical Hardener. W.R. Meadows; 1100 Clear Water-Base Concrete Curing Compound.
REPAIR MATERIALS A.
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.9
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES A.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B.
Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days) a.
2. 3. C.
Interior: 3500 psi.
Maximum Slump: 4 inches. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: Interior - 0.45.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete to only the following, as follows:
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
F.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.
2.10 A. 2.11 A.
Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FORMWORK A.
Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
B.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1.
C. 3.2
Class A, 1/8 inch; concrete surfaces exposed to view.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
3.3
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 3.4
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1.
3.5
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
JOINTS A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1.
2.
D.
Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1.
3.6
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete.
B.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.
C.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
D.
Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
E.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
F.
Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.7
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch. 1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. 1.
C.
3.8
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to receive a rubbed finish,.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1.
Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C.
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
E.
Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
F.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
G.
Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.9
FINISHING CONCRETE COUNTERTOPS A.
Concrete Countertops: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.10
Fabricate form for countertops to depth and dimensions shown on Drawings. Install unrusted mesh reinforcing. Smooth trowel top surface. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying. If indicated in Finish Legend, treat countertop with water-based concrete stain. When concrete has set, and cured at least 7 days, removed forms and create broken slab edge treatment. Take care not to damage top surface of countertop.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
D.
Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.
2.
3.
4.
Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.11
Maintain
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
3.12 A.
Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. REPAIRS Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 033053
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033053 - 9 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 033543 POLISHED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
This Section includes architectural polished concrete and floor finish system. DEFINITION
A. 1.3
Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural polished concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Reference Section 013300 Submittal Procedures for requirements. 1. 2. 3.
1.4
Product Data: provide manufacturer’s technical Product Data information. Contractor’s Certification. Approved System: provide information and technical data on compatibility and limitations of product(s).
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. 1. 2.
1.5
ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete Buildings. ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Manufacturer’s Product Data. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. 1.7
Sample warranty, issued by manufacturer, including specific reference to approximate square footage for area of installation, and specified installed products. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installation Contractor Qualifications: A Contractor specializing in performing the Work of this section and specifically trained by the manufacturer of the referenced equipment in the proper operation of the required equipment; has successfully completed not less than ten (10) projects of similar scope and project requirements.
POLISHED CONCRETE & FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033520 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Installation Contractor Experience: A Contractor specializing in the Work of this section with minimum five (5) year’s verifiable experience in the successful installation of the specified system. Submit verifiable completed project references for architect’s approval. Must submit proof of current status as a Certified Contractor for the System Manufacturer.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C-1077 and ASTM E-329.
D.
Jobsite Mock-Up: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 1.8
Provide a mock-up prior to the placement of floor slabs to demonstrate the finishes for Architect and Owner’s approval. Apply an 8 foot by 8 foot mock-up on the jobsite representative of the final completed floor system. Construction Manager to make available a finished concrete sample area representative of the same concrete mix design, supplier, placement techniques and concrete finish of the project installation. Demonstrate concrete preparation and system installation techniques, including correction of defective or deficient concrete finishes, if present. Provide simulated repairs if required (by others) in order to demonstrate final appearance. Install the field mock-up sample to match accepted design finish. Install top-coat finish to required gloss level and sheen, as specified by the Architect and / or Owner’s representative. Protect the finish as it will represent the level of quality required in the project until Substantial Completion.
WARRANTY A.
Project Installation Warranty: Refer to contract requirements for project warranty provisions.
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document, executed by authorized company official.
C.
Warranty: Commencing on date of Substantial Completion by Owner / Architect.
D.
Ten-Year Installation Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Product: Ameripolish, “SureLock Dye” system. 1.
B.
Colors: Refer to Room Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and ability to provide colors specified in the Room Finish Legend, other manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following:
POLISHED CONCRETE & FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033520 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
2.
Luma Concrete Systems. a.
LUMA-HARD H2™ Micro-Lithium penetrating hardener with Chloride Ion Blocker.
b.
LUMA-PROTECT™ Micro-Lithium Penetrating High Performance Stain Inhibitor.
Convergent Technologie: a. b.
2.2
Pentra-Sil Impregnator (HD) Hardener/Densifier. Pentra-Guard (HP) Surface Hardener and Protective Clear Coating.
CONCRETE POLISHING EQUIPMENT A.
Floor Grinder and Vacuum System, Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Superabrasive, Inc., LAVINA www.superabrasive.com . HTC. CPS 6320 or equivalent.
Variable
Speed
Series.
(800)
987-8403.
Concrete Polishing Abrasives, Acceptable Manufacturers: 1.
Superabrasive, Inc. Diamond Tools for Concrete Polishing as manufactured by a. b.
2. 3. C.
25”
Polishing disks with diamond grit: Metal Course/Resin Diamonds. Polishing Disk: 46 – 3500 as Specified (Ref: Section 3.3 – Floor Treatment Application).
HTC. CPS.
Vacuum System: Cat 5 Dust Extractor or equivalent, model determined by Installer to perform required dust extraction during grinding and polishing of concrete floor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Before beginning the Work, review the concrete conditions in the field with the Construction Manager, Architect, and, if applicable, Owner’s representative.
B.
Remove existing curing compounds, sealers, bond breakers and coatings prior to beginning the concrete polishing process and material application.
C.
Install System Samples to assure compatibility with existing project concrete placement and finish. Notify in writing the Construction Manager and Architect of any defects or deficiencies in the existing concrete surface condition.
POLISHED CONCRETE & FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033520 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 3.2
Proceed with installation of polished concrete system only after defects and deficiencies in the concrete slab that would adversely affect the desired finish result are corrected. .
FLOOR TREATMENT INSTALLATION A.
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1. 2. 3.
3.3
Deliver materials in specified manufacturer’s containers with seals unbroken; delivered materials to display manufacturer’s label indicating product name and instructions for storage, mixing and rate of application. Protect all delivered materials from freezing and inclement weather. Submit separate MSDS information for jobsite records on all delivered materials.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Responsibilities of the Construction Manager: 1.
2. 3. 4. 3.4
Establishing scheduling and sequencing the Work of this Section by coordinating access to the installation area and notifying all subcontractors to remain clear of the installation area, both during and after the installation process. Any access to the installation to be allowed only after required cure times have been achieved. Maintaining acceptable floor protection of the installation area after completion and continuing through project completion and final acceptance by the Owner. Maintaining a temperature controlled environment required for proper application and curing of the system and top-coat finish. Furnishing all site access, security, adequate temporary power, light, potable water and temperature-controlled areas.
FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION A.
Grind and polish concrete floor surfaces to remove laitance, topical contamination and stains. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Apply grinding/polishing method in two (2) directions (90⁰ perpendicular increments), maintaining consistency and uniformity. Begin with metal-coarse diamonds (46 – 120 Grit). Work up through progressively finer diamonds to tighten the substrate, increasing floor smoothness, durability and sheen.
Concrete Treatment System Application: 1. 2.
Apply penetrating densifier in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Continue polishing process to one of the following levels as directed by Architect or indicated on Finish Key and Room Finish Schedule: a. b. c.
Level I- Satin Sheen: 220 – 400 Resin-bond Diamonds. Level II- Medium Gloss: 600 – 800 Resin-bond Diamonds. Level III- High Gloss: 1,800 – 3,500 Resin-bond Diamonds.
POLISHED CONCRETE & FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033520 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Top-Coat Finish (Stain Inhibitor) Application : Two (2) Coats. 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.5
After achieving desired polish level, apply top-coat finish at a rate of 1500 – 3000 sf/gal. Repeat this step for the required two-coat application. Second coat to be applied in a 90⁰ direction after the first coat application. Allow specified dry time between each coat. Use high speed burnishing equipment (2,000 RPM) to burnish between each top-coat application.
FLOOR CLEANING A.
Clean floor prior to substantial completion using procedures as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. 2.
B. 3.6
Do not use commercial floor cleaners unless approved by the manufacturer. Do not use commercial floor strippers, primers or waxes as part of the final cleaning process..
Use only recommended Neutral pH Cleaners for final cleaning. FLOOR PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished floors from subsequent construction operations by layering 1/8” Masonite over the floor area. Dragging of any materials, including Masonite protection board across any unprotected floor area is not allowed 1. 2. 3.
B.
Tape joints of protection board across each board joint. Do not tape protection board to the finished floor surface. Do not allow any construction materials or liquids to come in contact with any unprotected finished floor areas.
Do not permit traffic (pedestrian, mechanical, construction, etc.) over any unprotected areas. END OF SECTION 033543
POLISHED CONCRETE & FLOOR FINISH SYSTEM WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
033520 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 044313 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.2
Stone masonry adhered to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry. Section 061600 “Sheathing” for sheathing board back-up and weather-resistant building paper.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B.
Samples: 1. 2.
1.3
For each stone type indicated. For each color of mortar required.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.
C.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER A.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufactured stone products matching existing installed products, based on the following original specification: 1.
2.2
Cultured Stone Textures, as manufactured by Owens Corning. Match existing color and textures.
MORTAR MATERIALS A.
Premixed Mortar: Type N, complying with ASTM C 270. Color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range to match as near as possible exiting aged mortar.
B.
Job Mixed Mortar: From the following components, as an option to Premixed Mortar. 1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated. a. b. c.
2.
Portland cement. Aggregate. Color mix.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar. a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3)
3. 4. 5. 6.
Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 7. 2.3
Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc. ProSpec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company.
Water: Potable.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, only where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” and as follows: 1.
B.
Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere.
Flexible Flashing: For flashing unexposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-ABarrier Wall Flashing. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. Polyguard Products, Inc.; [Polyguard 300] Polyguard 400. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
10) 2.4
Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.
Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.
Metal Weep Screed: manufacturer.
Galvanized or stainless steel, of type recommended by
B.
Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, paper-backed diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
C.
Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, type S-12 pancake head Super Tite Screws, manufactured by USG or other approved manufacturer, of sufficient length to penetrate into metal framing 3/8 inch. Select fasteners approved by stone product manufacturer.
2.5
MASONRY CLEANERS A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.6
Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Dominion Restoration Products. EaCo Chem, Inc. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc. Prosoco, Inc.
FABRICATION A.
Split-face stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and pattern specified in "Setting Stone Masonry" Article. 1.
Shape stone specified to be laid in pattern matching existing installation.
B.
Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
C.
Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1.
Thickness: As shown on Drawings, nominally 4 inches plus or minus 1/4 inch.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples. 1. 2.
2.7
Finish: Split face, or to match existing panels. Finish for Sills: Smooth, or install cast stone products.
MORTAR MIXES A.
General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Do not use calcium chloride. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. 2.
Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N.
C.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream. 1.
For latex-modified, portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
F.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products]. 1.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SETTING STONE MASONRY A.
Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3.
Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split.
B.
Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use.
C.
Arrange stones in pattern to match existing stone veneer.
D.
Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance.
E.
Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 3/8 inch at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch at widest points.
F.
Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. 2.
G.
Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
H.
Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up sheathing face at least 12 inches, and behind weather barrier. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches into masonry at each end. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches at ends. At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn flashing down to form a drip. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. Cut flexible flashing flush with wall face after completing masonry wall construction.
Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including above shelf angles and at flashing. 1.
Use metal drip screeds to form weep holes.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.2
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
B.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
C.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER A.
Install flashing over sheathing and behind weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing.
B.
Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063.
C.
Install lath over unit masonry and concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063. Install screws at spacing recommended by veneer manufacturer, but at a rate equal to 1 fastener per square foot, and not to exceed spacing of 6 inches on center in one direction.
D.
Install scratch coat over metal lath ½ to ¾ inch thick to comply with ASTM C 926. Allow to dry for 48 hours.
E.
Apply mortar for setting stone at rate of ½ to ¾ inch thickness, covering not more than 10 square feet at one time.
F.
Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat.
G.
Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. At any interior installation, prepare joints for a dry-stack look. Tool joints before mortar has set.
H.
Do not allow mortar to set up on face of units; clean face of units as work progresses.
3.4
POINTING A.
Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
C.
Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1.
3.5
Joint Profile: Concave.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3.6
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A.
Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
B.
Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soilcontaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. END OF SECTION 044313
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
04431316 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. 2.
1.2
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. Gusset plates. Loose lintels. Miscellaneous steel trim. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Loose steel lintels. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1.
1.3
Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1.
C.
Prefabricated building columns. Paint products.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Samples: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
C.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.3
FASTENERS A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
F. 2.5
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normalweight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi . FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
C.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
C.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
2.8
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.
2.9
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.10 A.
2.11
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.12
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: For items to be installed in exterior construction, hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: "Commercial Blast Cleaning.": 1. 2. 3. 4.
Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
C.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055000 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Steel tube railings and guards. Steel pipe railings and guards.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1.
C.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. b. c.
2.
Infill of Guards: a. b.
1.3
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. Railing brackets.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.
1.5
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS, GENERAL A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
STEEL AND IRON A.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
2.3
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide the following: 1. 2.
Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. 2.
2.4
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
D.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
F.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. 2. 3. 4.
H.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
I.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
J.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1.
K.
2.6
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.
2.7
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A.
Galvanized Railings:
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B.
For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1.
Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless primers specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. 2. 3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
3.4
ANCHORING POSTS A.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1.
3.5
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
ATTACHING RAILINGS A.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1.
B.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1.
3.6
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
B. 3.7
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
055213 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Wood blocking and nailers. Wood furring. Plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. 2.
Preservative-treated wood. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1.
B. 2.2
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061053 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2.
2.3
Wood nailers, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
C.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2.
2.4
Concealed blocking. Plywood backing panels.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Blocking. Nailers. Furring. Utility shelving.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061053 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
For utility shelving, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.5
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.
2.6
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061053 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
F.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.
G.
Kerf back of concealed board nailers and blocking to prevent warping and cupping. 1.
3.2
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Provide 3/8 - inch deep, single-blade-width kerf cuts for each size board as follows: a. 2x4: two. b. 2x6, 2x8: three. c. 2x10, 2x12: four.
PROTECTION A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061053 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 061600 SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.2
Wall sheathing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. WARRANTY
A.
Weather Resistant Sheathing Paper: Provide manufacturer’s standard form of expressed warranty to cover cost of materials and labor to correct problems caused solely by the failure of building paper for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
2.2
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.".
WALL SHEATHING A.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1.
2.3
Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and, where required by UL rated assembly listed on Drawings, Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.
For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
SHEATHING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061600 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D.
Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
3.2
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A.
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. END OF SECTION 061600
SHEATHING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
061600 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
1.2
Exterior standing and running trim.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Application: Where indicated, all exterior lumber.
STANDING AND RUNNING WOOD TRIM A.
2.4
Lumber Trim: Owner-supplied reclaimed wood. ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: 1.
2.5
For fastening to metal studs, use screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
062013 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. B.
For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners.
Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Pre-stain lumber to be stained, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting." INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. 2.
3.3
Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A.
Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B.
Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. 1. 2.
C.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners. END OF SECTION 062013
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
062013 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 064023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Interior standing and running trim. Interior frames and jambs. Interior decorative wood features. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. Division 09 Section “Staining and Transparent Finishes.”
DEFINITIONS A.
1.3
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. 2. 3.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.
C.
Samples for Verification:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 1.4
For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2.
E. 1.6
Do not obtain material required for fabrication until Architect has approved mockups, initial samples for selection, and samples for verification. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. 1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
B.
Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: 1. 2.
C.
Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Reclaimed wood supplied by Owner. New Wood, Where Required: Western Red Cedar, Grade A. Rough sawn finish.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware.”
B.
Hardware Standards: 1. 2.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets,
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3.
B04112. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following load rated capacities: a. b. c. d. e. f.
4.. 5.
Manufactured Unitized Drawer System: Limited to drawers not exceeding 100 lbf applied static load or 75 lbf applied dynamic load. Box Drawers: For boxes less than 6 inches high and up to 24 inches wide: 75 lbf minimum medium duty load rating. Box Drawers: For boxes more than 6 inches high and less than 12 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide: 75 lbf minimum medium load duty rating Box Drawers: Less than 12 inches high, except pencil, keyboard, or shelf drawers, and not more than 24 inches wide; full extension with 100 lbf medium duty load rating. Lateral File Drawers and Box Drawers wider than 24 inches, but not more than 42 inches, and heights greater than 3.5 inches: minimum 150 lbf heavy duty load rating. Roll-Out/Pull-Out Shelf Slides (Low Profile): 100 lbf load rating.
Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf load rating. Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf load rating.
C.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
D.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
D.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1.
2.4
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
Interior Woodwork Grade:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior 064023 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. 2.
E.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.
2.5
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Lumber Trim: 1. 2. 3.
Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. Face Surface: Saw textured.
C.
For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D.
For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
E.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.
G.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.6
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.
Grade: Custom.
A.
Lumber Trim: 1. 2. 3.
B. 2.7
Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. Face Surface: Smooth textured.
For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
B.
Fasteners for Interior Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
C.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1.
2.8
Use adhesive that has a VOC content of less than 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
SHOP FINISHING A.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.
General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.
D.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels.
Transparent Finish: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Grade: Custom. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer. Staining: Match approved sample for color. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. a.
6.
Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joint with full-surface contact through length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
G.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2. 3.
H.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
Match color and grain patter of trim for transparent finish across joints. Install trim after gypsum board finishing operations are completed. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warp. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry and fill holes. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 8 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
J. 3.3
Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064023 - 9 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. Cabinet hardware. Plastic-laminate-faced countertops. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples: 1. 2.
1.3
Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
B.
Do not obtain material required for fabrication until Architect has approved mockups, initial samples for selection, and samples for verification.
C.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.4
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 1 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Type of Construction: Frameless.
D.
Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E.
Reveal Dimension: 1/4 inch.
F.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1.
G.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
H.
Balanced construction is mandatory. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. Cabinet Doors, Inside and Outside, unless otherwise noted: Grade VGS. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product(s) listed in the Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding, where unitized drawer systems are not indicated. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3.
As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. Match Architect's sample. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range and indicated in the Finish Legend.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 2 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
J. 2.2
Edges of Plastic-Laminate Clad Doors, Drawer Fronts, Shelves: PVC tape, 3-mm thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Doellken-Woodtape PVC Edgebanding. WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): containing no urea formaldehyde. Particleboard: a. b.
3. 4. 5.
2.3
ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, for countertops at sinks and lavatories.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1.
Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
2.4
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows: 1.
Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): opening.
D.
Frameless Concealed Hinges- Soft Close (European Type): Blum Clip Top 110 Degree Face Frame Full Overlay Hinge with BLUMOTION. Blum Product Number: Item #152739.
E.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
F.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
G.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: 1. 2.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of
BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.
H.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; [metal] [plastic] [metal, two-pin type with shelf holddown clip].
I.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1.
Manufactured Unitized Drawer System: Blum: “Metabox.” Version C15. Series 330, or approved alternate product: Full Extension plus 3/4 inch (18 mm) override. Available Heights: Select slide height best suited to height of drawer box indicated on Drawings. a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Type N: 2-1/8 inches (54 mm). Type M: 3-5/8 inches (86 mm). Type K: 4-5/8 inches (118 mm). Type H: 5-7/8 inches (150 mm). Do not use manufactured unitized drawer system on drawer boxes exceeding 8 inches high, on lateral file drawers, or for box drawers of any depth exceeding 24 inches wide. Limited to drawers not exceeding 100 lbf applied static load or 75 lbf applied dynamic load.
Roll-Out/Pull-Out Shelf Slides (Low Profile): 100 lbf load rating. a. b.
Accuride 322. Accuride 340 lock-out slide.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 4 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
6.
Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf. a. b.
7.
Knape & Vogt: 8200 side mounted mounting to underside of top. Knape & Vogt: 1500 underdrawer slide
Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf. a.
Knape & Vogt: 8150.
J.
Plastic Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.
K.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
L.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
M.
Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
N.
Countertop Grommets: Indicated in Specialties Schedule on Drawings; Doug Mockett, Model MMS-21. Color: Black metallic, or as selected by Architect from manufacturers full line.
O.
Countertop Support Bracket: Indicated in Specialties Schedule on Drawings; TMI Systems. 3 inch angle form; length of leg selected from manufacturer’s full range to best support countertop width. Color: Black
P.
Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
Q.
Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick.
R.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.5
Satin Aluminum, Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A.
Grade: Custom or better, unless otherwise noted.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.
As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Legend.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Core Material: 1-1/8 inch thick particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. 1.
E.
Core Material at Sinks: 1-1/8-inch thick particleboard made with exterior glue, mediumdensity fiberboard made with exterior glue, or exterior-grade plywood. 1.
F.
2. 3.
2.6
Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
Splashes: Provide 4-inch high splashes fabricated from same material as countertop substrate, not less than ½ inch thick, and complying with the following: 1.
G.
Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
Provide endsplashes or sidesplashes at countertops which die into walls, partitions, or taller millwork. Match material, color, and height of sidesplashes or endsplashes to backsplashes, and to material and color of countertop. Provide full-height backsplashes, end- and side-splashes where indicated on Drawings.
Countertop Edges: Plastic Laminate Edge; HDPL HGS. Hot contact cement. Match color of countertop laminate, unless otherwise indicated in Finish Schedule MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Where required, provide fire-retardant treated softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1.
2.7
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
FABRICATION A.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
D.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2.
F.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. END OF SECTION 064116
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
064116 - 8 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 072413 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.2
Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over gypsum sheathing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.3
Class PB EIFS: Physical properties and structural performance that comply with ANSI/EIMA 99A. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: 1. 2.
Samples for Initial Selection. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. a.
Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected.
D.
Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.
E.
Maintenance data.
F.
Warranty.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1.
E. 1.5
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Per ASTM E 119. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS per NFPA 268. Potential Heat: Acceptable level per NFPA 259. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.
B.
Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. 2. 3.
1.6
Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which polymer-based exterior insulation and finish system manufacturer agrees to repair or replace materials which have been installed according to manufacturer’s instructions that deteriorate or fail due to manufacturing defects of the products. 1.
Deterioration and failure include the following: a. b.
Bond failure. Peeling.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
c. d. e. 2.
Flaking. Chipping. Water intrusion.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Dryvit Systems, Inc. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. Parex, Inc.; a brand of ParexLahabra, Inc. Sto Corp.
MATERIALS A.
Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
B.
Insulation Adhesive: Standard formulation.
C.
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." 1.
D.
Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.
E.
Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulation.
F.
Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer.
G.
Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, standard acrylic-based coating.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match existing campus building.
H.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate.
I.
Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063.
J.
Soffit Vent: Fry Reglet: “EIFS Soffit Vent”; 2 inch wide. Model PCS-75-V-200. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
K.
Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended , elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below: 1. 2.
Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone sealant. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.
B.
Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. 2.
3.2
Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
B.
Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation. 1. 2.
Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method. Coat the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing unless EIFS manufacturer's written instructions specify using primer/sealer with ribbon-and-dab method. Apply adhesive to a thickness of not less than 1/4 inch for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation before placement. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before installing mechanical fasteners, beginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with a minimum penetration into the steel framing of 5/16 inch. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals. a. b.
9. 10.
11. 12.
Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in sheathing.
Interlock ends at internal and external corners. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
13.
14. 15. 16.
17.
18. 19.
Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch. Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. After installing insulation and before applying reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges with strip reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. b. c.
Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories.
E.
Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating lamina
F.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; and where wall height changes.
G.
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam shapes in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
H.
Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1.
I.
Standard-impact reinforcing mesh unless otherwise indicated.
Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. J.
Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.3
Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, to match existing campus installation.
Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal. Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant application, including cylindrical sealant backing, can be installed without protruding beyond EIFS surface.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements.
B.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
C.
Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. END OF SECTION 072413
POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
072413 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 074113 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. 1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
C.
Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. 1.7
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
B.
Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
A.
Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of final acceptance of facility.
Special Weathertightness Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of final acceptance of facility.
Manufacturer’s Material Warranties: The Contractor shall furnish, in writing, the following manufacturer’s material warranties which cover all Non-Structural Metal Roofing System components, such as roof panels, flashing, accessories, and trim, fabricated from coil material: 1.
A manufacturer’s twenty (20) year exterior material finish warranty warranting that the factory color finish, under normal atmospheric conditions at the Project Site, will not crack, peel, or delaminate; chalk in excess of a numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4214; or fade or change colors in excess of 5 NBS units as measured in accordance with ASTM D 2244. Liability under this warranty is exclusively limited to refinishing or replacing the defective coated coil material. a.
Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of final acceptance of facility.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
A roofing system manufacturer’s 5 year system weathertighness warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Roofing Materials: Provide sloped standing seam metal roofing with a minimum slope of 3 on 12. Color match stacks, fans, and vents on roof incorporated into standing seam metal roofing system utilizing the metal roof manufacturer’s accessories. Conceal exhaust fans in attic areas and conduit to wall louvers whenever possible. Paint these items the same color as the roof. Provide a slip sheet and ice and water shield membrane. Provide metal roofing with smooth fascia panels and striated field panels to mitigate any oil canning effects. Provide a 20 year warranty. Roof system wind design load is 140 MPH. Install roofs over a structural steel deck. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.
C.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference: 1.
Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft..
D.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
E.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. 2.
F.
Uplift Rating: UL 90, or in conformance with wind loads and speeds listed. Hail Resistance: SH (severe hail).
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.3
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1.
B.
Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.
Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with ribs at panel edges; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1. 2.
Basis-of Design Panel: Berridge Cee-Lock. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.028-inch (24 gauge) nominal thickness. a. b.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel, or stainless-steel sheet. Joint Type: Panels snap together. Panel Coverage: 16-1/2 inches. Panel Height: 1-1/2 inches. Sealant: Factory applied sealant inside receptor leg. Uplift Rating: UL 90. Clips: Two-piece floating to accommodate thermal movement. a.
2.4
Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Material: 0.064-inch- nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminumzinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment (Slip Sheet): Provide self-adhering, coldapplied, sheet underlayment slip sheet, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. 2. 3.
Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start "HR." Grace, W. R. & Co.; Vycor Ultra.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
c. d. e. f. 2.5
Henry Company; Perma-Seal PE. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. TAMKO, TW Underlayment. TC MiraDRI; WIP 300HT.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.
B.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D.
Gutters and Downspouts: Where indicated, provide gutters and downspouts formed from same material as roof panels according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish to match roof fascia and rake trim. 1.
If sheet metal accessories including, but not limited to, the gutters and downspouts are not provided by the roof panel manufacturer, refer to related Section 076200 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”
E.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.
F.
Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. 2. 3.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.6
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C.
Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.
D.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
2.7
FINISHES A.
Panels and Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below or on Drawings, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1.
Apply over the entire roof surface with specific attention paid to the following locations: a.
Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall line.
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
b. c. d. e. f. B. 3.3
Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches. Around penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches.
Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment at roof edges, hips, valleys, and ridges, curbs, and penetrations. Comply with requirements of SMACNA referenced standard. METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. Watertight Installation: a. b. c.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
B.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
C.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
B.
Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
07411316 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants. Latex joint sealants.
Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for sealing edge moldings at acoustical ceiling perimeter trim with sealant.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A.
1.3
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.4
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
B.
Mockups: Install mockup of each type, color, and condition of joint sealant, not less than 48 inches long, in locations directed by Architect. Approved mockups which are undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion may be incorporated into the finished Work.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.6
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
WARRANTY A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL A.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B. 2.2
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Type: Single component (S). Grade: Nonsag (NS). Class: 100/50. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).
Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3
BASF Building Systems. Dow Corning Corporation; 798. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. Pecora Corporation; 890 Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. Pecora Corporation. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
Type: Single component (S). Grade: Nonsag (NS). Class: 25. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.
Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Type: Single component (S). Grade: Nonsag (NS). Class: 50. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).
Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 2.4
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac NP-1 Bostik, Inc. Pecora Corporation. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -1a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
BASF Building Systems. Bostik, Inc. Pecora Corporation. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. Tremco Incorporated.
Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M). Grade: Pourable (P). Class: 25. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T)].
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.
Latex Joint Sealant (LS-1): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
2.5
BASF Building Systems, Sonolac. Bostik, Inc; Chem-Calk 600. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.
General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealantsubstrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
2. 3.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. b. c.
Metal. Glass. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3.
F.
3.3
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. 2.
B.
3.4
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Interior Joints In Horizontal Traffic Surfaces: 1. 2.
Product Type: Single or multi-component nonsag, traffic grade, Class 25, or Class 50. Specific Joint Conditions: a. b. c.
3. B.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Interior Joints In Vertical Surfaces And Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. 2.
Product Type: Latex. Specific Joint Conditions: a. b. c. d. e.
3. C.
Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. Other joints as indicated.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. Tile control and expansion joints. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and elevator entrances. Other joints as indicated.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Nontraffic Surfaces In Wet Areas: 1. 2.
Product Type: Silicone single-components acid curing, nonsage mildew resistant. Specific Joint Conditions: a.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
b. 3.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
079200 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes hollow-metal work.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.2
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for standards for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. Section 087101 “Door Hardware Schedule” for scheduled hardware set.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.3
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. COORDINATION
A.
1.4
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.
C.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Product test reports. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2
Amweld International, LLC. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. Deansteel. Mesker Door Inc. Republic Doors and Frames. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.
2.3
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated in the Door Schedule. 1. 2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. Doors: a. b. c.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. Face: Uncoated, Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1) d. e. 3.
Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush, interlocking with no visible seam. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb, vertical steel stiffener, or manufacturer's standard.
Frames: a.
Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. 1)
b. 4. 2.4
Provide metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
Provide metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch where installed in wet locations such as shower rooms, or as indicated in Door Schedule.
Construction: Face welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS A.
Jamb Anchors: Select jamb anchors from the following types to suit wall conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1.
2.5
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
MATERIALS A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
2.6
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors: 1.
C.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. 3.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.
Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1)
4.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. D.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. 2.
E.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3.
2.7
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Provide fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1.
2.8
Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
ACCESSORIES A.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b. c. d.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
e. f. g. 2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a.
3. 4.
b. c. d.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
3.2
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.
C.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a.
B.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081113 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. Field finishing new doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C. 1.3
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples: For factory-finished doors. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company Inc. Chappell Door Co. Eggers Industries. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081416 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
7. 8. 9. 2.2
Poncraft Door Company. Vancouver Door Company. VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2 , made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.4
Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). Species: Match existing doors. Cut: Rotary cut, or match existing doors. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center and balance match. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. Core: Particleboard. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
FABRICATION A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. 2.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
FLUSH WOOD DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081416 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.5
FIELD FINISHING A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
B.
Complete fabrication, including factory fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
D.
Finish doors in field, or local shop, that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Match existing stain, if any, and finish sheen.
E.
Transparent Finish: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Grade: Premium. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane comparable to TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane system. Staining: If any, match existing doors. Effect: Match existing doors. Retain one of two options in subparagraph below or revise to suit Project. Sheen: Match existing doors. Mockup: Before proceeding to finish all doors, provide a sample to Owner and Architect to verify field finish results.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D.
Field-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
081416 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes: 1.
B.
Related Section: 1.
1.2
Overhead coiling service doors.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.3
Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2.
C. 1.4
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show locations of replaceable fusible links.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Maintenance Data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
083323 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A.
Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated.
B.
Curtain Jamb Guides (Counter and Service Doors): Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.2
OVERHEAD SERVICE DOORS A.
Door Curtain Materials and Construction: 1.
2. B.
2.3
Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 11/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from metal to match curtain slats and finish.
General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. OVERHEAD SERVICE DOOR ASSEMBLY
A.
Service Doors: 1. 2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Overhead Door Company, Series 627. Insulated. Motor operation. Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the followings: a. b. c. d. e.
Cookson Company, Model CD8-2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.; Model ESC-10. Raynor. Wayne-Dalton Corp.; Model 510. Windsor Door.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
083323 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3. 4. 5. 6.
Door Curtain Material: Primed galvanized steel interior and exterior. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/4-inch center-to-center height, by ½ inch thick. Curtain Jamb Guides: Extruded clear anodized aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise. Hood: Match existing, otherwise galvanized metal. a. b.
7. 8. 9. 10. B.
2.
2.4
Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. Equip door with slide bolts locking operable from inside. Door, Guide, Bottom Bar, and Hood Finish: Primed galvanized steel. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. Door Finish: Manufacturer’s standard powder coating, color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range to match as near as possible existing remaining service door.
Motor Operator: 1.
C.
Shape: Square. Mounting: Match existing door mounting, otherwise face of wall.
Overhead Door Co.; match existing remaining door motor operator horsepower and electrical configuration. Controls: Key switch with clear sightline of door operation. 3 position switch: Start Up, Start Down, Stop.
Drive: Overhead Door Co.: Match existing remaining door motor operator COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM- COUNTER DOORS AND OVEREHAD SERVICE DOORS
A.
General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B.
Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
083323 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
3.2
Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 083323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
083323 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Scope: Provide and install door hardware on interior and exterior doors as indicated in Door Hardware Schedule and coordinating with Door Schedule.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors. Section 087101 “Door Hardware Schedule.
ACTION SUBMITTAL A.
Product data for each item of door hardware.
B.
Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work. Use same scheduling sequence and format and same door numbers as in Contract Documents.
C.
Keying Schedule.
1.3
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
B.
Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
DOOR HARDWARE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
087100 - 1 April 4 2016
Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
Provide only those products listed in the Hardware Schedule. No exceptions permitted, and no substitutions proposals will be considered.
B.
Do not provide products that have manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with fire-rated labels, and as otherwise approved by Architect or Owner. Manufacturer’s identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
C.
Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended; aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished head to match surface of door hardware. Comply with NFPA 80 for door hardware in fire-rated applications.
2.2
FINISHES A.
Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.3
KEYS A.
Keys: Nickel silver, permanently inscribed with visual key control number and notation “DO NOT DUPLICATE.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance, labeled fire door assembly construction, and wall and floor construction. PREPARATION
A. 3.3
Comply with DHI A1150W Series for preparing wood doors. INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
DOOR HARDWARE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
087100 - 2 April 4 2016
Construction Documents
C.
Mount door hardware units at heights as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. 2. 3.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors.” a.
b.
D.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. Set units level, plumb, and true to line. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. 2.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
E.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
F.
Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches
G.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1.
Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
087100 - 3 April 4 2016
Construction Documents
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Adjusting: Adjust and check every operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door controls to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment, and comply with accessibility requirements.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
087100 - 4 April 4 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 087101 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
PROJECT: Will Rogers Downs Renovation Cherokee Nation Entertainment 20900 S. 4200 Road Claremore, Oklahoma 74019
ARCHITECT: TriArch 618 East 3rd Street Tulsa, Oklahoma, United States 74120
Prepared By: Tom Howard, AHC Builders Supply, Inc. P. O. Box 471496 74147-1496 Date: April 4 2016
Hardware Sets Keying Instructions Key All Locks To The Existing Schlage Everest Key System
Manufacturer List Code GL IV LC PB RO SC VO
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hard Rock Lobby Renovation Catoosa, Oklahoma
Name Glynn Johnson Ives LCN Closers (No Substitution) PBB, INC Rockwood Schlage (No Substitution) Von Duprin (No Substitution)
087101 - 2 January 19, 2015 Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE
PROJECT: Will Rogers Downs Renovation Cherokee Nation Entertainment 20900 South 4200 Road Claremore, Oklahoma, 74019
ARCHITECT: Triarch 618 East 3rd Street Tulsa, Oklahoma, United States 74120
Prepared By: Tom Howard, AHC Builders Supply, Inc. P. O. Box 471496 74147-1496
Date: 4/4/16
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma Hardware Sets Keying Instructions Key All Locks To The Existing Schlage Key System SET #01 Doors: 112 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1
Continuous Hinge Key Removable Mullion Exit Device Exit Device IC Mortise Cylinder IC Rim Cylinder Door Pull Parallel Arm Closer W/ Stop Protection Plate Saddle Threshold 1/2" High Door Sweep Gasketing Corner Pad Mullion Seal
CFM HD1 DH KR4954 99NL-OP x 110MD-NL 99EO 26-091 20-057 BF158 TYPE 1XHD FASTENING 4040 XP SCUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 425 DW 200 SA DW S88 D H&J 54 CP 5100S DH
SP28 US26D, US28 US28 626 626 US32D AL US32D AL
PE VO VO VO SC SC RO LC RO NA NA PE NA NA
SET #02 Doors: 109, 164, 166 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Continuous Hinge Exit Device IC Rim Cylinder Door Pull Parallel Arm Closer W/ Stop Protection Plate Saddle Threshold 1/2" High Door Sweep Gasketing Corner Pad
CFM HD1 DH 99NL-OP x 110MD-NL 20-057 BF158 TYPE 1XHD FASTENING 4040 XP SCUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 425 DW 200 SA DW S88 D H&J 54 CP
US26D, US28 626 US32D AL US32D AL
PE VO SC RO LC RO NA NA PE NA
SET #03 Doors: 160 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hinges Exit Device IC Rim Cylinder Door Pull Regular Arm Closer Protection Plate Dome Floor Stop Gasketing
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 99NL-OP x 110MD-NL 20-057 BF158 TYPE 1XHD FASTENING 1461 REG TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 442 S88 D H&J
US26D US26D, US28 626 US32D AL US32D US26D
PB VO SC RO LC RO RO PE
Page 2 of 7
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma SET #04 Doors: 174 6 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Hinges Key Removable Mullion Exit Device Exit Device IC Mortise Cylinder IC Rim Cylinder Door Pull HD Parallel Arm Closer/Stop Protection Plate Door Silencer
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 KR4954 99NL-OP x 110MD-NL 99EO 26-091 20-057 BF158 TYPE 1XHD FASTENING 1461 S CUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" SR64
US26D SP28 US26D, US28 US28 626 626 US32D AL US32D
PB VO VO VO SC SC RO LC RO IV
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 BF15847 T1HD Mounting 1461 S CUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" SR64
US26D US32D AL US32D
PB RO LC RO IV
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 70C 4 X 16 111 X 70C 1461 REG/PA TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D US32D US32D AL US32D US32D
PB RO RO LC RO RO IV
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 111 X 70C 70C 4 X 16 1461 REG/PA TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D US32D US32D AL US32D US32D
PB RO RO LC RO RO IV
SET #05 Doors: 111 6 2 2 2 2
Hinges Push/Pull Set HD Parallel Arm Closer/Stop Protection Plate Door Silencer
SET #06 Doors: 171 6 2 2 2 2 2 2
Hinges Push Plate Pull Plate Parallel Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #07 Doors: 161A, 161B, 168 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Pull Plate Push Plate Parallel Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
Page 3 of 7
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma SET #08 Doors: 110, 165, 167 3 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Pull Plate Push Plate HD Parallel Arm Closer/Stop Protection Plate Door Silencer
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 111 X 70C 70C 4 X 16 1461 S CUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" SR64
US26D US32D US32D AL US32D
PB RO RO LC RO IV
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 L460P 111 X 70C 70C 4 X 16 1461 S CUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" SR64
US26D 626 US32D US32D AL US32D
PB SC RO RO LC RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND80PD RHO 10-025 1461 REG TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D 626 AL US32D US32D
PB SC LC RO RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND80PD RHO 10-025 1461 REG/PA TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D 626 AL US32D US32D
PB SC LC RO RO IV
SET #09 Doors: 130A, 130B 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Deadlock Pull Plate Push Plate HD Parallel Arm Closer/Stop Protection Plate Door Silencer
SET #10 Doors: 135, 146 3 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Regular Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #11 Doors: 102 3 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Parallel Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
Page 4 of 7
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma SET #12 Doors: 106 3 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Overhead Door Holder Door Silencer
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND80PD RHO 10-025 450F Series SR64
US26D 626 SP28
PB SC GL IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND53PD RHO 10-025 1461 REG TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D 626 AL US32D US32D
PB SC LC RO RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND53PD RHO 10-025 1461 S CUSH TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" SR64
US26D 626 AL US32D
PB SC LC RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND53PD RHO 10-025 406 SR64
US26D 626 US32D
PB SC RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 FB458 ND80PD RHO 10-025 1461 REG TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 442 SR64
US26D US26D 626 AL US32D US26D
PB IV SC LC RO RO IV
SET #13 Doors: 108, 153A, 172 3 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Regular Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #14 Doors: 153B, 159 3 1 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset HD Parallel Arm Closer/Stop Protection Plate Door Silencer
SET #15 Doors: 131A, 131B, 132, 144, 162, 170 3 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #16 Doors: 191 6 2 1 2 2 2 2
Hinges Flush Bolt Lockset Regular Arm Closer Protection Plate Dome Floor Stop Door Silencer
Page 5 of 7
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma SET #17 Doors: 308 6 2 1 2 2
Hinges Flush Bolt Lockset Wall Bumper Door Silencer
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 FB458 ND80PD RHO 10-025 406 SR64
US26D US26D 626 US32D
PB IV SC RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND80PD RHO 10-025 1461 REG/PA TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D 626 AL US32D US32D
PB SC LC RO RO IV
4B81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 FB458 L460P 70C 4 X 16 111 X 70C 1461 REG/PA TBSRT K1050 10" x DW-2" 406 SR64
US26D US26D 626 US32D US32D AL US32D US32D
PB IV SC RO RO LC RO RO IV
BB81 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 ND40S RHO 10-025 406 SR64
US26D 626 US32D
PB SC RO IV
SET #18 Doors: 178 3 1 1 1 1 3
Hinges Lockset Parallel Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #19 Doors: 188 6 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Hinges Flush Bolt Deadlock Push Plate Pull Plate Parallel Arm Closer Protection Plate Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #20 Doors: 133, 134 3 1 1 3
Hinges Privacy Set Wall Bumper Door Silencer
SET #21 Doors: 131C 1 1 1 1
Continuous Hinge Exit Device Vandal Resistant Exit Dev Trim IC Rim Cylinder
CFM HD1 DH 99EO VR910NL 20-057
US28 US32D 626
PE VO IV SC
Page 6 of 7
Will Rogers Downs Renovation Claremore, Oklahoma 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Parallel Arm Closer W/ Stop Protection Plate Saddle Threshold 1/2" High Door Sweep Gasketing Corner Pad Overhead Drip Cap
4040 XP SCUSH TBSRT K1050 30" x DW-2" 425 DW 200 SA DW S88 D H&J 54 CP 16 A DW+4"
AL US32D AL
LC RO NA NA PE NA NA
Manufacturer List Code GL IV LC NA PB PE RO SC VO
Name Glynn Johnson Ives LCN Closers National Guard PBB, INC Pemko Rockwood Schlage (No Substitution) Von Duprin
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 088000 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Windows. Doors. Interior borrowed lites.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 and ICC's 2006 International Building Code, using the following design criteria: 1.
1.3
Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glass Samples for Selection: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1.
Submit three (3) samples of representative colors in color listed in glass schedule below for initial section of specific glass tint.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2. B.
1.5
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
2.2
Provide glass lites in
GLASS PRODUCTS A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Provide Kind FT (Fully Tempered) where indicated on Drawings, or as required by applicable codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.
A.
Transparent Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1376-03 "Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Basis-of-Design Product: Pilkington “Mirropane T.M. Transparent Mirror.” Thickness: ¼ inch. Color: Standard with manufacturer for type of glass. Provide Kind FT (Fully Tempered) where indicated on Drawings, or as required by applicable codes, ordinances, and authorities having jurisdiction.
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
5. 2.3
Installation Requirements: Install transparent mirror with the coated surface facing the observed or subject side of the glazing.
GLAZING GASKETS A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from[ one of] the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.4
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
GLAZING SEALANTS A.
General: 1.
2. 3. 4. B.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.5
Dow Corning Corporation; 790. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. Pecora Corporation; 890. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
GLAZING TAPES A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 2.6
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
C.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
2.7
MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A.
Glass Type GL-1: Clear float glass. 1.
B.
Glass Type GL-2: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. 2.
C.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Thickness: 6.0 mm. Provide safety glazing labeling.
Glass Type GL-3: Transparent mirror glass. 1. 2.
Thickness: 6.4 mm (1/4 inch). Provide safety glazing labeling where required to install safety glazing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GLAZING, GENERAL A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2
GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.3
SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
088000 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. 2.
1.2
Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. 2.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
B.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
C.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1.
D.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. 2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. b.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 22 gauge (0.034 inch). Depth: As indicated on Drawings, or 3-5/8 inches unless otherwise noted.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a.
4.
Resilient Furring Channels: transmission. a.
2.3
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 25 gauge. 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound
Configuration: Asymmetrical.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. 2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge (0.0179 inch), unless otherwise indicate to be 20 gauge. Depth: Not all sizes may be required on this Project. Refer to Drawings for sizes required. a. b. c. d. e. f.
B.
1-5/8 inches. 2-1/2 inches. 3-5/8 inches. 4 inches. 6 inches. 8 inches.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1.
2.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2)
3.
Deflection Clip: Single-piece deflection clip; ASTM C 645, 33,000 psi yield G60 galvanized steel sheet; 16 gauge steel thickness; for use with 3-5/8 inch framing system. 1)
C.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD; VertiTrack VTD Series. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Flex-Ability Concepts, Inc.; Three-Legged Dog.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge (0.040 inch) (1.0 mm).
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 1.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
E.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 25 gauge 0.0179 inch. Depth: 7/8 inch.
F.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
G.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. Depth: 3/4 inch Insert depth. 1.
2.4
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Factory-Prefabricated Drywall Panel Backing Panels: Option in lieu of flat-strap backing plates, or plywood backing panels: Fire-retardant treated wood nailer (Dricon) with factory-applied metal wings for attaching panel to metal framing members; capable of supporting wallmounted cabinets, plumbing fixtures, wall-protection components, and similar items. Provide products that comply with requirements of applicable codes for flamespread and smoke developed. Provide standard units of 16 or 24 inches long as required to fit framing spacing, or trimmable units for non-standard, off-module backing, or corner and angle-wall layouts. 1.
Danback; Deitrich Metal Framing, Inc. a. b. c.
2.5
D16F D24F Danback “Trimmables.”
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
E.
Install sill sealer gaskets in walls indicated to be filled with acoustic insulation. Apply a bead of acoustical sealant at the bottom of the runner track prior to installing finish board material.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D.
3.5
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Coordinate location of hangers beneath ducts and piping so that hangers do not block access to, resetting of, operation or, or opening of duct access panels or dampers, or access to and operation of valves and similar piping controls. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1.
Space studs as follows: a. b. c. d.
C.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Tile backing panels: 12 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Install 4-inch deep framing members at all single-stud-thickness plumbing walls shown to receive wall-hung lavatories , unless otherwise indicated, or unless indicated for double-stud chase wall framing. Space framing member at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated to receive special facing materials which require closer spacing, or for other special conditions.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a.
Install two 20-gauge studs at each jamb for the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Pair studs face-to-face, or nest together according to stud manufacturer’s recommendations. 1) 2) 3) 4)
b. c. 3.
D.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
Direct Furring: 1.
E.
Solid core wood doors equal to or greater than 3 feet-0 inches wide. Hollow metal doors equal to or greater than 3 feet-0 inches wide. Doors of any opening width where the leaf weighs more than 100 pounds. Pairs of doors of any opening width.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092216 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Interior gypsum board. Tile backing panels.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal and acoustic insulation installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For the following products: 1.
1.3
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
B.
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.
Install mockups for the following: a.
2. 3. 4.
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.4
STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
1.5
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. 2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
2.2
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. 2.
C.
American Gypsum. CertainTeed Corp. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. Temple-Inland. USG Corporation.
Thickness: 5/8 inch Long Edges: Tapered.
Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. D.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. 2.
E.
Thickness: 1/2 inch. Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. Long Edges: Tapered. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TILE BACKING PANELS A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: standard edges. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. 3. 2.4
ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TRIM ACCESSORIES A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.
Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. Shapes: a.
Cornerbead. 1) 2)
b. c. d. e.
90-degree: Equal to USG B1W, or if required B1XW EL (Extra Wide) 135-degree: Equal to USG B1 OS.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Equal to USG B9. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Equal to USG B4 Series. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Equal to USG No. 093, single-piece B-shaped control joint and keyed metal flanges with removable tape.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.5
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape: 1. 2.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1.
2.6
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: manufacturer.
As recommended by backing panel
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
D.
Thermal and Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Before installing sound attenuation or thermal insulations blankets, if any, and closing wall with first layer of gypsum board on second side of wall or partition, clean out all dust and debris from floor track and vacuum thoroughly.
C.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
I.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
J.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
K.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: ASTM C 840: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Level 1: Level 2: Level 3: Level 4: a. b. c. d.
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Panels that are substrate for tile. Where indicated on Drawings. At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish, except wet areas indicated to receive waterborne epoxy finish.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
L.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: instructions.
M.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
N.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
3.3
Finish according to manufacturer's written
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. 2. 3.
4.
B.
Standard Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces, as indicated on Drawings. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies such as curved ceiling panels where the required radius dimension is smaller than standard, Type X, or ceiling type will accommodate under normal bending circumstances. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings, or in wet locations such as on walls behind sinks, lavatories, and toilets and urinals not indicated to receive tile, and for 2 feet on side walls adjacent to sinks and lavatories, shower or tub room walls not receiving tile, in janitor or housekeeping rooms on walls behind or adjacent to service sinks.
Single-Layer Application: 1. 2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and minimize end joints. a. b. c.
3. C.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated . Apply in lengths sufficient to extend from floor to ceiling with no horizontal joints
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application: 1.
2.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E.
Curved Surfaces: 1. 2.
3.4
Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. 2.
3.5
Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: ASTM C 840: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Areas behind cabinetry. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings Insert locations. Surfaces indicated to receive textured finish Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b. 5. E.
2. 3. 4. 5.
3.7
Level 5: Where indicated in Finish Schedule. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
Finish Level Descriptions: 1.
F.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish.
Level 1: Tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. Tool marks and ridges acceptable. Level 2: Level 1, plus separate coat of compound at joints, angles, fasteners,, and accessories. Tool marks and ridges acceptable. Level 3: Level 1, plus two separate coats of compound at joints, angles, fasteners and accessories. Tool marks and ridges are not acceptable; surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Level 4: Level 1, plus three separate coats of compound at joints, angles, fasteners and accessories. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Level 5: Level 4, plus separate skim coat of compound over entire surface of gypsum board, unless high‐build leveling primer specified in Division 09 Section “Interior Painting” is used.
Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
092900 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 093000 TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Porcelain ceramic wall tile and base. Porcelain ceramic floor tile and base. Stone thresholds. Crack isolation membrane.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
C.
Samples: 1. 2.
1.3
Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” for tile backing panel.
Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
1.4
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2.
Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TILE PRODUCTS A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B.
Glazed Wall Tile: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to Room Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule. Composition: Porcelain ceramic. Module Size: Refer to Finish Legend. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for products indicated in Finish Legend. Finish: Per manufacturer’s designation for products indicated in Finish Legend. Tile Color and Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a.
C.
Glazed Floor Tile. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to Room Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule. Composition: Porcelain. Module Size: Refer to Finish Legend.. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. Finish: Per manufacturer’s designation Tile Color and Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a.
D.
External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape, same size as adjoining flat tile.
Base: Coordinate with sheet vinyl tile flash cove base and trim.
Glazed Base: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to Room Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule. Composition: Porcelain. Module Size: Refer to Finish Legend. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. Finish: Per manufacturer’s designation
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
7. 8. 9. 2.2
Tile Color and Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Provide base as part of wall tile or floor tile, based on selection indicated in Finish Legend. Provide cove if indicated.
SETTING MATERIALS A.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
B.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2. C.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Jamo Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
2. 3. 4.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Jamo Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D. 2.3
Organic Adhesive: Not permitted. GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2. 3. B.
Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
Premixed Urethane Grout: Install in toilet rooms as indicated in Room Finish Schedule. 1.
2.4
Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Jamo Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Manufacturer: StarQuartz “Quartzlock 2.”
THRESHOLDS A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1.
B.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1.
2.5
Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A.
General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Polyethylene Sheet: nominal thickness. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
2. C.
Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
Applications: General crack suppression membrane over control, isolation, and expansion joints in concrete floor substrate in dry areas.
Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch nominal thickness. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
2. 2.6
Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch
Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.
Applications: For showers and very wet floors.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A.
2.7
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Refer to Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.” MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material: Product: Schluter: Scheine, 2mm.
C.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
i.
TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
PREPARATION A.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
B.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
C.
Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
D.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1.
Porcelain Wall Tile: 1/8 inch. Polymer modified sanded grout.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2. F.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. 2.
G.
If joint widths for wall tile are less than 1/8 inch, provide unsanded polymer modified grout.
Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1.
At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
H.
Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
I.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in wall tile installations in toilet rooms according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
J.
Install wall backer units specified in section 092900 “Gypsum Board” and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
K.
Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
3.4
INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1.
Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113. a. b.
Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set, or latex- portland cement mortar. Grout: Depending on joint width, provide one of the following: 1) 2)
2.
Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122. a.
Tile Type: T2.
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
b. c.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: Depending on joint width, provide one of the following: 1) 2)
3.
Tile Installation F125A: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCA F125A. a. b.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: Depending on joint width, provide one of the following: 1) 2)
B.
Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1.
Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCA W245. a. b. c.
Tile Type: Refer Finish Legend. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: Depending on joint width selected by Architect, provide the following 1) 2)
C.
Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
Polymer-modified sanded grout for joint widths 1/8 inch or greater Polymer-modified unsanded grout for joint widths less than 1/8 inch.
Interior Wall Tile Installation, Cementitious Backer Board Substrate on Metal Studs. 1.
Tile Installation W245-11: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer board. a. b. c. d.
Tile Type: Ceramic (porcelain); refer Finish Legend. Tile Type: Glass mosaic; refer Finish Legend. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cementitious bond coat; ANSI A118.1 or better. Grout: Depending on width of joint provide one of the following. Refer to Material Finish Legend and Room finish Schedule for location for urethane grouts. 1) 2) 3) 4)
Polymer-modified sanded grout. Polymer-modified unsanded grout. Urethane sanded grout where indicated. Urethane unsanded grout where indicated. END OF SECTION 093000
TILING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
093000 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes 1. 2.
1.2
Acoustical panels. Exposed suspension systems for acoustical ceilings.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Maintenance data. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.
1.7
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full size panels equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: 1. 2.
B.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2.
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. Chicago Metallic Corporation. Tectum Inc.
A.
Classification: Type and Form, ACT 1: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
B.
Color: White.
C.
Edge/Joint Detail 1. 2.
D.
ACT1, ACT3, ACT4: Angled Tegular, type and style as indicated by manufacturer’s designation for Product listed in Finish Legend. ACT3: Flat Panel, Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E, wet-formed water-felted mineral fiber base with factory-applied unperforated vinyl-faced membrane on face. (Clean Room).
Thickness: 1. 2.
ACT1, ACT3, ACT4: ¾ inch. ACT3: 5/8 inch, or as standard with system indicated in Finish Legend.
E.
Modular Size: ACT1, ACT 2, ACT3, ACT4: 24 by 48 inches.
F.
Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
G.
Humidity Resistance: Enhanced sag-resistance; refer to product designation
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Donn DX.
B.
Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufactures offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. “Prelude XL.” CertainTeed Corp. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D.
Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
2.5
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. Face Design: Flat, flush. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. Cap Finish: Painted white.
Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. Face Design: Flat, flush Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. Cap Finish: Plated with bright chrome (mirror-like) metallic finish as selected from manufacturer's full range
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. SEALANT
A.
Sealant at Edge Molding: For sealants installed at joint between edge molding and painted wall surfaces, refer to Section 099123 “Interior Painting.”
B.
Acoustical Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Proceed with installation only after all wet work, including painting, has been completed and thoroughly dried.
B.
Examine all job conditions prior to starting work. unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after
PREPARATION A.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling, unless specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings. Avoid using less-than-half width panels at borders, and comply with layouts shown on Drawings.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
3.3
Layout ceiling grid such that no main runners are installed beneath mechanical ductwork fire damper access doors. Only easily removable cross-tees may be installed beneath access doors. Coordinate work with mechanical trades and, where possible, from mechanical ductwork shop drawings. Inform Architect before installing any ceiling grid which appears to have a conflict, so adjustments can be made in ceiling grid, lighting fixture, and diffuser designs and layout. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1.
B.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. 2.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2. 3. 3.4
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.
CLEANING A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
095113 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Resilient base. Resilient molding accessories. Resilient stair accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.
1.4
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
RESILIENT BASE A.
Resilient Base: 1.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Mannington.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096513 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Flexco, Inc Johnsonite. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. 3.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Cove (base with toe).
C.
Minimum Thickness: Indicated by manufacturer’s standard for product listed in Finish Legend.
D.
Height: 4 inches.
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
H.
Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Legend.
2.2
RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A.
Resilient Stair Treads: 1. 2.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Roppe Corporation, USA. Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. Flexco, Inc. Johnsonite. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096513 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
h. i. j. k. B.
Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C. 2.3
Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. PRF USA, Inc. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). Surface Design: Raised circular Vantage design #98, without riser, or as indicated in Finish Material Schedule. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. Nosing Height: 38 mm. Thickness: 6 mm and tapered to back edge. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Resilient Molding Accessory: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Flexco, Inc. Johnsonite. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). Roppe Corporation, USA. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
Description: Refer also to Schedule on Drawings. a. b. c. d. e. f.
Carpet edge for glue-down applications. Nosing for carpet. Nosing for resilient floor covering. Joiner for tile and carpet. Transition strips. Reducer strips.
B.
Material: Rubber.
C.
Profile and Dimensions: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range..
D.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096513 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.4
INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours
C.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.
D. 3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096513 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
E. 3.3
Do not stretch resilient base during installation. RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
C.
3.4
Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096513 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
Vinyl floor tile.
Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1.
Show details of special patterns.
C.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
D.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedules.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. CLOSEOUT SUBMTITALS
A. 1.5
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed, and return to Owner any full, unused tile from opened boxes.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096519 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.
1.7
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.8
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3.
48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.9
WARRANTY A.
Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace resilient floor tile that does not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: a.
Vinyl Floor Tile: 10 years material defect warranty, 2 year limited labor warranty.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096519 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
VINYL FLOOR TILE A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated in the Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule. 1.
LVT1: ASTM F 1700.
B.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
C.
Thickness: 1.
D. 2.2
LVT1: 0.098 inch (2.5 mm).
Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations for products listed in the Finish Legend. INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a.
C.
Vinyl Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Floor Polish: None required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096519 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not use gypsum-based floor patching leveling compounds; use only portland-cement based patching and leveling compounds as recommended by tile manufacturer.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1.
E. 3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1.
C.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1.
Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096519 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. 2. 3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish, Vinyl Flooring: None required.
E.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096519 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.
This section includes the following: 1. Resinous flooring system.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application of a cementitious urethane based self-leveling seamless flooring system.
B.
The system shall have the color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 3/16 inch. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Cove base (if required) to be applied where noted on plans and per manufacturers standard details unless otherwise noted
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Latest edition of Manufacturer's literature including performance data and installation procedures. B. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product being used. C. Samples: A 3 x 3 inch square sample of the proposed system. Color, texture, and thickness shall be representative of overall appearance of finished system subject to normal tolerances. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production, sales, and technical support of epoxy and urethane industrial flooring and related materials.
B.
The Applicator shall have experience in installation of the flooring system as confirmed by the manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the product specified.
C.
No requests for substitutions shall be considered that would change the generic type of the specified System.
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Food, Drug Administration (FDA), and local Health Department.
E.
System shall be in compliance with the Indoor Air Quality requirements of California section 01350 as verified by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
F.
A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General Contractor and the Owner to review and clarification of this specification, application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and production schedule.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Packing and Shipping 1.
B.
Storage and Protection 1. 2.
C.
All components of the system shall be delivered to the site in the Manufacturer's packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number.
The Applicator shall be provided with a dry storage area for all components. The area shall be between 60 F and 85 F, dry, out of direct sunlight and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components shall be kept on site for review by the Engineer or other personnel.
Waste Disposal 1.
The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for non-hazardous waste generated during installation of the system.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Site Requirements 1. 2. 3.
B.
Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are between 60 F and 85 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 % and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 F above the dew point. The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting level during the preparation and installation of the system.
Conditions of new concrete to be coated with cementitious urethane material.
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
2. 3. 4. C.
Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days and have fully cured for 14 days in accordance with ACI-308 prior to the application of the coating system pending moisture tests. Consult the flooring manufacturer for results outside of these paramaters. Concrete Finish: Flat rubbed finish, float or light steel trowel finish (a hard steel trowel finish is neither necessary or desirable). Do not apply sealers and curing agents.. Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor barrier to protect against the effects of vapor transmission and possible delamination of the system.
Safety Requirements 1. 2.
The Owner shall be responsible for the removal of foodstuffs from the work area. Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum.
1.07 WARRANTY A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. warrants that material shipped to buyers at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially to Dur-A-Flex, Inc. published literature if used in accordance with the latest prescribed procedures and prior to the expiration date. B. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchase. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOORING A.
Flooring: a. Basis‐of‐Design Manufacturer: Dur‐A‐Flex, Inc. i. Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flow Crete RT 2. Tennant Company ‐ Architectural Coatings 1.
System Materials: a. b.
Primer: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Poly-Crete TF, resin, hardener and activator powder. Topping: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Poly-Crete MD resin, hardener and aggregate.
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
Patch Materials a. b.
Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete MD (up to ¼ inch). Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over ¼ inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete WR.
2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., 95 Goodwin Street, East Hartford, CT 06108, Phone: (860) 528-9838, Fax: (860) 528-2802. B.
Manufacturer of Approved System shall be single source and made in the USA.
2.03 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A.
Primer 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Percent Solids VOC Compressive Strength ASTM C 579 Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength ASTM D 790 Abrasion Resistance, ASTM C 501 H 10 Wheel, 1,000 gm load, 1,000 cycles Hardness, Shore D Potlife @ 70 F
Topping 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Percent Reactive VOC Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D 4541 Compressive Strength, ASTM C 579 Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Impact Resistance @ 125 mils, MIL D-3134, No visible damage or deterioration
Poly-Crete TF 100 % 0 g/L 7,250 psi 750 psi 4,400 psi 900 mg weight loss 85 15 minutes Poly-Crete MD 100 % 0 g/L 400 psi, substrates fails 7,400 psi 1,800 psi >160 inch lbs
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.04
EXAMINATION
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
A.
Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting flooring performance. 1.
Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for flooring installation and comply with requirements specified.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
.
General 1.
Existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, moss, algae growth, laitance, friable matter, dirt, and bituminous products.
2.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. a. Perform relative humidity test using is situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 99% relative humidity level measurement. b. If the relative humidity exceeds 99% then the Owner and/or Engineer shall be notified and advised of additional cost for the possible installation of a vapor mitigation system that has been approved by the manufacturer or other means to lower the value to the acceptable limit. c. If the vapor drive exceeds 99% relative humidity or 20 lbs/1,000 sf/24 hrs then the Owner and/or Engineer shall be notified and advised of additional cost for the possible installation of a vapor mitigation system that has been approved by the manufacturer or other means to lower the value to the acceptable limit.
3.
Mechanical surface preparation a.
Shot blast all surfaces to receive flooring system with a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine (Blastrac or equal). All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a minimum profile of CSP 4-5 as described by the International Concrete Repair Institute. b. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using diamond grinders, needle guns, bush hammers, or other suitable equipment. c. Wherever a free edge will occur, including doorways, wall perimeters, expansion joints, columns, doorways, drains and equipment pads, a ¼ inch deep by 3/16 inch wide keyways shall be cut in. d. Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 1/4 inch wide are to be chiseled or chipped-out and repaired per manufacturer’s recommendations. RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
4. At spalled or worn areas, mechanically remove loose or delaminated concrete to a sound concrete and patch per manufactures recommendations. 3.03 APPLICATION A.
General 1.
The system shall be applied in three distinct steps as listed below: a. Substrate preparation b. Primer c. Topping/overlay application
2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Primer 1. 2.
C.
Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil-free compressed air. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or other leveling work has been specified by the Architect. A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator.
The primer shall be applied with a coverage rate of 80-90 sf/kit. The topcoat shall be comprised of a liquid resin, liquid hardener and activator powder kit and installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Topping 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
The topping shall be applied as a self-leveling system as specified. The topping shall be applied in one lift with a nominal thickness of 3/16 inch. The topping shall be comprised of three components, a resin, hardener and filler as supplied by the Manufacturer. The hardener shall be added to the resin and thoroughly dispersed by suitably approved mechanical means. Aggregate shall then be added to the catalyzed mixture and mixed in a manner to achieve a homogenous blend. The topping shall be applied over horizontal surfaces using a pin rake, trowels or other systems approved by the Manufacturer. Spread rate per kit is 32 sq. ft. Immediately upon placing, the topping shall be degassed with a 15/16 inch spiked roller. The finish floor will have a nominal thickness of 3/16 mils.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
A.
Tests, Inspection 1.
The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator: a. Temperature 1. Air, substrate temperatures, relative humidity, and, if applicable, dew point. b. Coverage Rates 1. Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of material used against the area covered.
3.05
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. B.
Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer’s directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections. END OF SECTION 096723
RESINOUS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096723 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes modular carpet tile.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.2
Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C. 1.4
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. Type of subfloor. Type of installation. Pattern of installation. Pattern type, location, and direction. Pile direction.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Sample warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Maintenance data. MAINTENANCE MATERAILS SUBMITTAL
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
TILE CARPETING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096813 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 1.7
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer with a proven, successful record of installations of the same type and size as this Project.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. 2.
1.8
Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.9
Comply with CRI 104. FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.10 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. 3.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of face fiber, and delamination. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TILE CARPETING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096813 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CARPET TILE A.
Products: Indicated in the Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule. 1. 2.
Color: Indicated in the Material Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule Size: Indicated by manufacturer’s product designation.
B.
Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material Insert treatment.
C.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
C.
Rubber Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded rubber strips as indicated in Finish Legend notes, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
C.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096813 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
F.
Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
G.
Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
H.
Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressuresensitive adhesive.
I.
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
J.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
K.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
L.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
M.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders, unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.
N.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. 2. 3.
O.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096813 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 096900 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Access-flooring panels and understructure. Floor panel coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include layout, details, sections, and relationship to adjoining Work.
C.
Samples: For each type of product and exposed finish.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Product test reports.
B.
Seismic Design Calculations: For seismic design of access-flooring systems including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Flooring Panels: 5 percent of number installed. Pedestals: 5 percent of number installed. Stringers: 5 percent of number installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Seismic Performance: Access flooring shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 1 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
B.
Structural Performance: According to testing procedures in CISCA's "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors": 1.
Concentrated Loads: 1000 lbf with the following deflection and permanent set: a. b.
2. 3.
Ultimate Loads: 2000 lbf. Rolling Loads: With local or overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch. a. b.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C.
CISCA Wheel 1: 10 passes at 400 lbf. CISCA Wheel 2: 10,000 passes at 400 lbf.
Stringer Load Test: 450 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch. Pedestal Axial Load Test: 6000 lbf. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: 1000 lbf x inches. Uniform Load Test: 250 lbf/sq. ft. with a maximum top surface deflection not to exceed 0.040 inch and a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch. Drop Impact Load Test: .
Fire Performance: 1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84, Class A; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. b.
2. 2.2
Top-Surface Deflection: 0.10 inch. Permanent Set: 0.010 inch.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
FLOOR PANELS A.
Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan. Mechanical or adhesive methods for attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable
B.
Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels interchangeable with other field panels without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure. 1. 2.
C.
Size: Nominal 24 by 24 inches. Attachment to Understructure: Bolted.
Unfilled Steel Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, with the die-cut flat top sheet and die-formed and stiffened bottom pan welded together, and with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish.
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 2 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
1. 2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tate Access Floors, Inc., All Steel 1000 Access Floor Panel. Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
3. 4.
2.3
ASM Modular Systems, Inc. Camino Modular Systems, Inc. Computer Environments, Inc. Haworth, Inc.
Solid Panels: Flat, solid top surface. Grates: Grating ribs arranged in manufacturer's standard pattern to produce a nominal open area of 25 percent, and capable of withstanding an impact load of 200 lbs. Provide mechanical dampers with each panel unit. a. Quantity: As shown on Drawings. b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
UNDERSTRUCTURE A.
Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap); made of steel. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. of bearing area. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to base plate. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod that includes a specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height setting. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed anti-rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the head cannot freely rotate Zinc electroplating shall be prohibited on all pedestal components, including head plate, threaded rod, adjustment nut, pedestal tube, base plate, and all fasteners. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height over a range of not less than 2 inches. Head: Designed to support the panel system indicated. a.
B.
Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels.
Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems designed to bolt to pedestal heads with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish. 1. 2.
Stringers shall support each edge of panels. Coat stringers with conductive galvannealed coating. Zinc electroplating is prohibited on stringers and stringer fasteners.
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 3 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
3.
4. 2.4
Fasten stringers individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each foot of stringer length. Provide bolts to provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals. Connections depending on gravity or spring action are not acceptable or permitted. Continuous Gaskets: At contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden sound, seal off the underfloor cavity from above, and maintain panel alignment and position.
FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS A.
Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated on the contract drawings. Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer, the type, color and pattern shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard.
B.
High-Pressure Plastic Laminate: Factory applied, NEMA LD 3, High-Wear type, Grade HDH; fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face with integral trim edging. 1. 2.
2.5
Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 1 megohm and no more than 20,000 megohms when installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested according to NFPA 99. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FABRICATION A.
Fabrication Tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
2.6
Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/- 0.035” Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025” Floor panel width or length of required size: +/- 0.010” Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015”
Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with structural performance requirements. Where indicated, fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets. ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor. 1.
B.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of floor panels; for power, communication, and signal services; and complying with the following requirements: 1.
Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 300-lbf concentrated load.
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 4 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Cover and Box Type: Grommet with twist-close cover and including steel junction box for electrical receptacle with provision for telephone connectors and signal cables. Location: In center of panel quadrant unless otherwise indicated. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified elsewhere. Receptacles and Wiring: Heavy-duty duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding, 20 A, 125 V, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Number of Receptacles for Outlet: One. a.
Wiring Method: Power-in connectors.
C.
Closures: Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or other construction, provide metal-closure plates with manufacturer's standard finish.
D.
Ramps: Not steeper than 1:12, with raised-disc or textured rubber or vinyl-tile floor coverings, and of same materials, performance, and construction requirements as access flooring.
E.
Panel Lifting Device: Panel manufacturer's standard portable lifting device for each type of panel required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 6 inches.
C.
Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum subfloor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install access-flooring system and accessories under supervision of access-flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B.
Adhesive Attachment of Pedestals: Set pedestals in adhesive, according to access-flooring manufacturer's written instructions, to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
C.
Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force panels into place.
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 5 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
D.
Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 1/8 inch where panels abut vertical surfaces. 1.
To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of steel-encapsulated, wood-core panels with sealer recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.
E.
Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under already-installed access flooring.
F.
Grounded Flooring Access Panel Systems: Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings. Not more than 10 ohms as measured without floor coverings.
G.
Scribe and install to closely fit against subfloor and other adjacent surfaces, and seal with mastic.
H.
Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
I.
Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air leakage, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the following tolerances: 1. 2.
Plus or minus 1/16 inch in any 10-foot distance. Plus or minus 1/8 inch from a level plane over entire access-flooring area.
K.
Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
L.
Replace access-flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 096900
ACCESS FLOORING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
096900 - 6 April 4 2016 Addendum 003
SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Vinyl wall covering. Thermoplasic sheet wall panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate appearance and aesthetic effects and set quality standards for installation. 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Provide a mockup for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with requirements in ASTM F 1141. Locate mockup on-site in location as directed by Architect and of size indicated as follows: Minimum mockup size: Full roll width of covering by full height of selected wall. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for wall covering. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
1.6
Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
WALL COVERINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097200 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. b.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for vinyl shower wall covering installation and seaming methods indicated. 1.
1.7
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 Insert value or less.
Engage an installer who is certified by the vinyl shower wall covering manufacturer for applications of these products and types of installations.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Lighting: Do not install wall coverings until a lighting level of not less than 15 fc is provided at the surfaces to receive wall coverings.
C.
Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
WALL COVERINGS A.
General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.
B.
Provide products indicated in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
2.2
VINYL WALL COVERING A.
Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: following: 1. 2.
B.
Provide mildew-resistant products complying with the
FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type I, Light Duty, Type II, Medium-Duty, and Type III, Heavy-Duty products. ASTM F 793 for strippable wall coverings that qualify as Category I, Decorative Only; Category II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability; Category III, Decorative with High Serviceability; Category IV, Type I, Commercial Serviceability; Category V, Type II, Commercial Serviceability; or Category VI, Type III, Commercial Serviceability products.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Indicated by designation in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
WALL COVERINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097200 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.3
THERMOPLASIC SHEET WALL COVERING A.
Manufacturer: Advanced Technology, Inc. www.advtechnology.com
B.
Product: Pattern and color as listed in Finish Legend.
C.
Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches; 0.032 inch thickness (0.8 mm).
D.
Accessories: Provide matching and coordinating trim pieces at all corner and edge of panel conditions.
E.
Standards: 1. 2. 3.
F. 2.4
Fire Retardant: Class A, complying with ASTM E 84. Impact Resistance: Comply with ASTM D 5420. Abrasion Resistance: Comply with ASTM D 1044.
Installation: Comply with manufacturer’s recommended method of mounting panels using adhesive strips, construction adhesive, or other method recommended in writing. ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer
B.
Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate.
C.
Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wallcovering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
B.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. 2.
C.
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.
WALL COVERINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097200 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
E.
Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried.
F.
Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.
G.
Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
H.
Install reversing every other strip.
I.
Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.
J.
Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.
K.
Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted.
L.
Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
M.
Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips.
N.
Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
O.
Use cleaning methods recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. Remove strips that cannot be cleaned.
P.
Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200
WALL COVERINGS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097200 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 097800 WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes decorative and protective wall panels and resilient tiles. 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) wall panels. Decorated thermoplastic sheets. Luxury vinyl tiles. Trim accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate joints and termination points.
C.
Samples: Submit 2 samples, 8 by 10 inches, for verification of wall panel texture and color for selections indicated in this Section and the Finish Legend. 1.
1.3
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements.
B.
Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For wall panels and trims to include in maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
A.
Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 01 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section. 1. 2.
Quantity: Furnish quantity of FRP wall panels and trims equal to 5 percent of amount installed. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials.
WALL PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097800 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall panels applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. b.
B.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s acceptance of finish color, texture, pattern and workmanship standards. Comply with Division 01 Quality Control (MockUp Requirements) Section. 1. 2. 3.
Mock-Up Size: One full sized panel, or partial size panel located at inside corner to demonstrate typical panel selected and trim colors and applications. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s approval.
C.
Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting at Project site to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
D.
Source Quality: Obtain fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels from a single manufacturer. Provide panels and molding only from manufacturer specified to ensure warranty and color harmonization of accessories.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.
B.
Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to site.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store panels and accessories dry and indoors. Store material to protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft cloth or brush to avoid scratching or abrasions.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Requirements:
WALL PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097800 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. B.
1.9
Installation shall not begin until building is fully enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation for a period of time sufficient to stabilize interior temperature and humidity. During installation, and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by panel adhesive instructions.
Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED (FRP) WALL PANELS A.
General: Provide panels of each type of from same run or dye lot.
B.
Manufacturer: Korogard.
C.
Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Pre-finished fiberglass-reinforced wall panels. Surface Texture: Standard. Color: Selected by Architect, or indicated in Finish Legend. Size: As indicated in Finish Legend, or 4 by 8 foot sheets.
DECORATED THERMOPLASTIC SHEETS A.
Manufacturer: ATI, Inc.
B.
Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Pre-finished metal-clad thermoplastic sheets Surface Texture: Standard. Color: Selected by Architect, or indicated in Finish Legend. Size: As indicated in Finish Legend, or 4 by 8 foot sheets, by 0.32 inch (0.8 mm).
WALL PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097800 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C. 2.3
Attachment Method: Pressure sensitive adhesive strips, or construction adhesive, as recommended by panel manufacturer for construction conditions. LUXURY VINYL TILES
A.
General: Luxury vinyl floor tiles used as wall cladding.
B.
Manufacturers: Provide products by the following manufacturers as listed in the Finish Legend on the Drawings: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
2.4
Armstrong, Inc. Mannington. Procedo.
Luxury vinyl tiles. Refer also to standards and installation methods listed in Division 09 Section “Resilient Tile Flooring.” Surface Texture: Standard. Colos: Indicated in Finish Legend. Size: As indicated in Finish Legend and by manufacturer.
Attachment Method: Pressure sensitive adhesive strips, construction adhesive, or standard resilient floor tile adhesive as suited for vertical installations, or as recommended by tile manufacturer for construction conditions. ACCESSORIES
A.
FRP Trims: Extruded integral color PVC Trim provided by panel manufacturer. Match panel color.
B.
Adhesives and Sealants: Water-resistant, non-flammable adhesive meeting requirements of ASTM C 557, manufactured by FRP panel manufacturer, or other compatible adhesive approved by him that will not void warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Upon receipt, inspect all packaging and materials for damage
B.
Before installation, open cartons and carefully inspect all panels and accessories.
C.
Before beginning installation, inspection project conditions. Commence installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
WALL PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097800 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Panels should be opened and allowed to acclimate for 48 hours prior to installation. The building shall be closed with HVAC operational and conditioned to final use ambient humidity and temperature. Room temperature should be approximately 65° F or above before beginning installation.
B.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
3.3
INSTALLATION A.
Install all FRP products and accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, using manufacturer-supplied or approved adhesives and sealants.
B.
All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch of panel expansion at joints and edges, to insure proper installation.
3.4
MAINTENANCE A.
Wipe down using a damp cloth and mild Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations
soap
solution
or
cleaner.
END OF SECTION 097800
WALL PANELS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
097800 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1.
1.2
Galvanized metal.
DEFINITIONS A.
Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 5 (Semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B.
Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
1.5
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
EXTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099113 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co. Porter Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
PAINT, GENERAL A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility: 1. 2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As indicated in the Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
2.3
METAL PRIMERS A.
Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 1. 2. 3.
2.4
Benjamin Moore; Moore’s IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: MDF per coat: 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). Pittsburgh Paints; 6-209 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer: MDF per coat: 3.8 mils (0.097 mm). Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ30: MDF per coat: 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
WATER-BASED PAINTS A.
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11. 1.
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: MDF per coat: 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
EXTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099113 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2. 2.5
Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: MDF per coat: 1.3 mils (0.033 mm)..
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS A.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94. 1. 2.
B.
Benjamin Moore; M24 D.T.M. Alkyd Semi-Gloss; MDF per coat: 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). Sherwin-Williams; B55 series, Direct-to-Metal Enamel (alkyd enamel); MDF per coat: 3.0 to 5.0 mils (0.07 to 0.013 mm).
Finish Coats: Low-Odor Alkyd Enamel Paint and Thinner, Gloss Level 5 (SemiGloss): 1. 2.
PPG: WallHide Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-gloss Oil;27-110 Thinning and Cleanup: Pittsburgh Paints Odorless Thinner; 21-300 Line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
C.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
EXTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099113 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents, or paint thinner, so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. a.
Remove any surface imperfections resulting from the hot-dip galvanizing process including, but not limited to, high spots, drips, runs, or standing slag. Use an abrasive mechanical sander to level surface, but do not expose bare metal. Finish with a light blast cleaning.
D.
Touch up any exposed base ferrous surfaces with galvanized metal primer paint compatible with hot-dip galvanized coating, and resulting in MDF not less than shop galvanized coating, or MDF recommended by paint manufacturer for application to ungalvanized ferrous surfaces.
E.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
F.
3.3
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
Do not wash out or clean brushes, rollers, pans or other items into Owner’s sinks, housekeeping sinks or basins, or other plumbing fixtures. Do not discharge paint, clean-up water, or cleaning solvents into Project or Owner’s plumbing waste system. Clean brushes and tools, and dispose of cleaning and excess materials legally dispose of off-site.
EXTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099113 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
C. 3.5
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.
Alkyd System: Apply to all hollow metal doors and frame. a. b. c.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
Latex System: Dot not apply to hollow metal doors and frames. Apply only to metal and uncoated sheet metal trim not subject to touch or abuse. a. b. c.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. END OF SECTION 099113
EXTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099113 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. 2.
1.2
Gypsum board. Ferrous metal.
DEFINITIONS A.
Gloss Level 1 (Matte or Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2 (High Side Sheen-Flat; Velvet): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 5 (Semigloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G.
Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B.
Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 1.5
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a.
3.
B.
1.6
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preinstallation conference at Project site. Review requirements for painting procedures including substrate preparation specified under this and other Sections, substrate conditions and pretreatment, curing periods, special installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). Porter Paints (Porter). Pratt & Lambert (P&L)
PAINT, GENERAL A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility: 1. 2.
C.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
D.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Colors: Indicated in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.3
GYPSUM BOARD FINISH SYSTEMS A.
Application: Exposed Gypsum Board Walls, Soffits, and Ceilings: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: S-W: PrepRite Interior Latex Primer, B28W200 Series. Finish First and Second Coats: S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel; B20W200 Series. Sheen: Low sheen acrylic enamel finish.
Application: Exposed Gypsum Board Walls in Wet and High-Humidity Areas: 1. 2. 3.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: S-W: PrepRite Interior Latex Primer, B28W200 Series. Finish First and Second Coats: S-W: Pro Industrial High Performance Epoxy, Sheen: Low sheen acrylic enamel finish.
Application: Exposed Gypsum Board Walls with High‐Gloss or Reflective Finish, in Lieu of No. 5 C. Gypsum Board Finish:
1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: Pittsburgh Paints: Drywall Surfacer: UC80133. MDF per coat: 6.8 to 9.0 mils (0.17 to 0.22 mm). Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: S/W: PrepRite High Build Interior Latex Primer/Surfacer B28W601. MDF per coat: 4.5 mils (0.11 mm). Finish First and Second Coats:__________________________________. Sheen: High gloss.
FERROUS METAL FINISH SYSTEMS A.
Application: Exposed Metal Stair Components and Railings and Exposed Guards: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Application: Exposed Structural Steel: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Primer: S-W Kem-Kromik Universal Metal Primer, B50Z Series. Finish First and Second Coats: S-W Industrial Enamel 100, B54Z-200 Series. Sheen: Semi-gloss acrylic enamel.
Primer: S-W Kem Bond HS. Finish Coats: S-W Kem Bond Acrylic Dryfall, B42W2 Series. Sheen: Eg-shell acrylic enamel. Apply primer and finish coats with spray equipment.
Application: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. 2. 3.
Primer: S-W Kem-Kromik Universal Metal Primer, B50Z Series. Finish First and Second Coats: S-W Industrial Enamel 100, B54Z-200 Series. Sheen: Semi-gloss acrylic enamel.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.5
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.
Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product in this description indicated below.
B.
Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1.
Products: Available products include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
C.
Bostik Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 Porter Paints: #1414 “Top Gun” Siliconized Latex Paintable Caulk. Sonneborn Building Products Div.; Chem Rex, Inc.; Sonolac. Tremco; Tremflex 834. Sherwin-Williams; Pro-Select Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk, 900A Series.
Application: Install sealants or caulks at joint between suspended acoustical ceiling grid wall edge trim and wall in all rooms schedule to receive painted walls or soffits and ceiling breaks, prior to painting installation. Provide paintable caulk or sealant. Do not install on walls scheduled to receive vinyl or similar wall coverings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1.
C.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2.
Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
D.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
E.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 5 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. 2.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC’s recommendations. a. b. c.
3.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 3. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents, or paint thinner, so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. a.
Remove any surface imperfections resulting from the hot-dip galvanizing process including, but not limited to, high spots, drips, runs, or standing slag. Use an abrasive mechanical sander to level surface, but do not expose bare metal. Finish with a light blast cleaning.
D.
Touch up any exposed base ferrous surfaces with galvanized metal primer paint compatible with hot-dip galvanized coating, and resulting in MDF not less than shop galvanized coating, or MDF recommended by paint manufacturer for application to ungalvanized ferrous surfaces.
E.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 6 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. F.
3.3
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the Finish Legend and Room Finish schedule. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Apply alkyd enamel systems to all shop or field primed or galvannealed interior hollow metal doors, frames, and handrails. Apply alkyd enamel systems to all exterior galvanized or galvannealed ferrous metalbased hollow metal doors, frames and handrails. Apply specified systems to interior shop-primed or unprimed miscellaneous steel where visible or in areas required to be painted, or in areas subject to high humidity or unconditioned areas where indicated by Owner. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 7 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1.
2. 3.
4.
C.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in occupied spaces, not including mechanical and electrical equipment or maintenance rooms, unless otherwise indicated, or unless color-coding is required by Owner’s maintenance department standards. 1.
F.
Paint exposed new galvanized metal ductwork in existing gymnasium with low-sheen (not flat) dry-fall alkyd paints. Protect adjacent work not indicated to be painted, and all existing surfaces below ducts where dry paint particles will fall.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 8 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
G.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
H.
Installation of Joint Sealants: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions for product and applications indicated. Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2.
I. 3.4
Remove excess sealants fro surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide flush joint configuration, unless otherwise indicated to be concave.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedures at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied to ascertain quality of materials and installation and compliance with requirements. 1.
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
2.
Quantitative material analysis. Abrasion resistance. Apparent reflectivity. Flexibility. Washability. Absorption. Accelerated weathering. Drying opacity. Accelerated yellowness. Recoating. Skinning. Color retention. Alkali and mildew resistance.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 9 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.
3.5
paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. Architect may, in the normal course of project inspection, test dry film thicknesses at random with a destructive gauge. Contractor will then correct areas found deficient, or, in areas found satisfactory, touch-up test areas according to procedures described in other Articles of this Section.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
Do not wash out or clean brushes, rollers, pans or other items into Owner’s sinks, housekeeping sinks or basins, or other plumbing fixtures. Do not discharge paint, clean-up water, or cleaning solvents into Project or Owner’s plumbing waste system. Clean brushes and tools, and dispose of cleaning and excess materials legally dispose of off-site.
C.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099123 - 10 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of shop‐ and field‐staining of exposed interior items and surfaces. a. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for shop priming and finishing interior architectural woodwork. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors” for factory preparation and finishing of flush wood‐veneer doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85‐degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to a low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured with a 60‐degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium‐sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60‐degree meter. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross‐reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2. 3.
1.4 A. 1.5 A.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. Submit 5 Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a.
Stained Wood: 4‐by‐8‐inch Samples of stained‐wood finish on representative surfaces.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Applicator. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1.
Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:
a. 1.6 A.
Stains and Transparent Finishes: 2 gal. of each color and type applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in‐service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain components of each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C.
Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full‐coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.
1.
Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.
a.
b.
2.
Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a.
Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). Full height of wall or panel for an area at least 4 feet wide. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review requirements for painting procedures including substrate preparation specified under this and other Sections, substrate conditions and pretreatment, curing periods, special installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
1.7 A.
Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the product information.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well‐ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. 1.8 A.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent‐thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: a. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). b. Sherwin‐Williams Co. (Sherwin‐Williams). c. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). d. Porter Paints (Porter). 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish‐coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best‐quality staining and transparent finish material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
1.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. 2.5 A.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
b.
Thinning and Cleanup: Pittsburgh Paints Odorless Thinner; 21‐300 Line.
INTERIOR STAINED WOODWORK SCHEDULE Alkyd‐Based Semi‐Transparent Stain Satin‐Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd‐based clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain 1.
Stain Coat: Interior Alkyd‐Based Penetrating Wood Stain.
a. b.
2.
Sealer Coat (Clear sanding sealer): Fast‐Drying Alkyd‐Based Clear Wood Sealer
a.
b.
c.
Benjamin Moore; C241; Benwood, Interior Penetrating Stain. Pittsburgh Paints: 77‐560 REZ Interior Stain Semi‐Transparent Oil. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
Benjamin Moore; 413 Benwood, Quick Dry Sanding Sealer. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Pittsburgh Paints; 6‐10 SpeedHide Interior Wood Sanding Sealer. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Sherwin‐Williams; Wood‐Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
3.
Finish Coats: Interior Alkyd‐Based Clear Satin Varnish.
a.
B.
Sherwin‐Williams: Wood Classic Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66‐300 Series. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
Waterborne Semi‐Transparent Stain Satin‐Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe filler before applying stain. 1.
Stain Coat: Interior Alkyd‐Based Penetrating Wood Stain Wood Stain.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
a. b.
2.
Sealer Coat (Clear Sanding Sealer): Fast‐Drying Alkyd‐Based Clear Wood Sealer.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Benjamin Moore; C241; Benwood, Interior Penetrating Stain. Pittsburgh Paints: 77‐560 REZ Interior Stain Semi‐Transparent Oil. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
Pittsburgh Paints; 77‐49 REZ Interior Polyurethane Satin Varnish. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Benjamin Moore; 413 Benwood, Quick Dry Sanding Sealer. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Pittsburgh Paints; 6‐10 SpeedHide Interior Wood Sanding Sealer. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Sherwin‐Williams; Wood‐Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
4.
Finish Coats: Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish.
a.
b.
c.
Benjamin Moore; 423‐00 Acrylic Urethane‐Low Lustre. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Pittsburgh Paints; 77‐49 REZ Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. Sherwin‐Williams; A68 Series; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin. Apply 2 coats if sealer coat is omitted. Apply at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of staining and application of transparent finishes will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 5 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface‐applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
b. c.
D.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 A.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill nail and screw holes in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Where transparent finish is required, backprime with spare varnish. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
APPLICATION General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 6 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1.
2.
3. 4.
6.
B.
7.
Stain and transparent finishes colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. Do not apply materials over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable finish. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field‐finished casework to match exterior. Sand lightly between each succeeding varnish coat.
Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
3.
4.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C.
Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. 2. 3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet‐back, or high‐pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in occupied spaces, not including mechanical and electrical equipment or maintenance rooms, unless otherwise indicated, or unless color‐coding is required by Owner’s maintenance department standards.
F.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass‐smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 7 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2.
J.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 A.
3.5 A.
Provide satin finish for final coats. Use low‐odor waterborne finishing systems to greatest extent possible.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedures at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied to ascertain quality of materials and installation and compliance with requirements. 1.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.
1.
B.
3.6 A.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint‐spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
Do not wash out or clean brushes, rollers, pans or other items into Owner’s sinks, housekeeping sinks or basins, or other plumbing fixtures. Do not discharge paint, clean‐up water, or cleaning solvents into Project or Owner’s plumbing waste system. Clean brushes and tools, and dispose of cleaning and excess materials legally dispose of off‐site. PROTECTION Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Varnish" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing staining and finishing operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 099300
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
099300 ‐ 8 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 101400 PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
1.2
Panel signs.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.3
ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. 2.
C. 1.4
Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.
Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Wood: Species: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Species: White oak. Thickness: ¾ inch. Panel Size(s): Indicated on Drawings and Signage Schedule. Finish: Weathered teak.
SIGNAGE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
101400 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B. 2.2
Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressuresensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. PANEL SIGNS
A.
ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 require tactile and Braille characters to be raised a minimum of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from face of sign.
B.
Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. 2.
C.
Panel Material: Colored acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. Match clear oak color. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
Text: Vinyl text and graphics applied to face of wood panel. 1. 2.
Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Font: Georgia, all upper case, or as indicated on Drawings and Signage Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.
B.
Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1.
3.2
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.
Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A.
Refer to Signage Schedule on Drawings for text, quantities, installation details and locations END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
101400 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.2
Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
B.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
2.2
Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. SOLID-POLYMER UNITS
A.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: General Partitions.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102113 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B.
Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, other available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Accurate Partitions Corporation. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. Comtec Industries/Capitol Partitions. Global Steel Products Corp. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.
C.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor-anchored, overhead braced.
D.
Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung/floor supported at free edge. 1.
E.
Screen Size: 18 inches by 42 inches high.
Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. 2. 3.
Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainlesssteel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. Polymer Panel Finish: One color and pattern in each room. a.
F.
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or stainless steel. 1.
G.
Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster.
Brackets (Fittings): 1.
Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum. a.
2.3
Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching panel.
ACCESSORIES A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. 2.
Material: Chrome-plated zamac. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard integral hinge for solid-polymer doors.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102113 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
3.
4. 5. 6.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theftresistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.4
FABRICATION A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. Provide 36-inch wide doors at accessible compartments if indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B.
Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.
3.2
ADJUSTING A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
TOILET COMPARTMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102113 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102113 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Corner guards. Chair rails.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Warranty: Sample of special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102600 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impactresistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
2.2
Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). CORNER GUARDS
A.
Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards: Fabricated from PVC plastic, acrylicmodified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges; fabricated with 90or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings. 1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Korogard Wall Protection Systems, Model G875 , or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.3
American Floor Products Co., Inc. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. Balco, Inc. Boston Retail Products. Construction Specialties, Inc. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. Pawling Corporation. Tepromark International, Inc. WallGuard.com.
Material: Extruded plastic, 0.78 inch minimum thickness. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. Length: As indicated on Drawings. Angle: 90-degree. Mounting: Construction adhesive or double-sided adhesive tape. Colors: Indicated in Specialty Schedule on Drawings. Match as nearly as possible to adjacent wall color.
CHAIR RAIL A.
Surface-Mounted Extruded Aluminum Chair Rail.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102600 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 3. 4.
Manufacturer: Schluter Systems. Material: Anodized aluminum. Length: Standard with manufacturer. Mounting: Construction adhesive or manufacturer’s adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1.
Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.
B.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
C.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
102600 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
Section 104416 “Fire Extinguishers” for extinguishers mounted inside cabinets and wallmounted extinguishers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Product Data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick or manufacturer’s standard thickness, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
2.2
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A.
Cabinet Type: Type suitable for 10-lb MP10 fire extinguisher. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104413 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
b. c. d. e. B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, Semi-Recessed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model SS-2409-6R. Cabinet Construction: Non-Rated. Inside box dimension: 6 inches deep by 24 inches high by 9-1/2 inches wide. Frame Overall Dimensions: 13 inches wide by 27-1/2 inches high. Cabinet Frame Projection From Wall: 2-1/2 inches, roll edge.
Cabinet Construction: Fire-rated, Semi-Recessed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
D.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. (Basis-of-Design, as listed in Specialties Schedule on Drawings). Potter Roemer LLC. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.
Basis-of-Design Product: Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model FS-SS-2409-6R. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated, Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, coldrolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. Inside Tub Dimension: 6 inches deep by 24 inches high by 9-1/2 inches wide. Frame Overall Dimensions: 13 inches wide by 27-1/2 inches high. Cabinet Frame Projection From Wall: 2-1/2 inches, roll edge.
Semirecessed Cabinet Trim: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E.
Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
F.
Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless steel.
G.
Door Material: Stainless steel.
H.
Door Style: Flush stainless steel with vertical view window: Larsen’s VERTICAL DUO.
I.
Door Glazing: Clear, unpatterned acrylic.
J.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104413 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
K.
Accessories: 1. 2.
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated. a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) 2) 3) 4)
L.
Finishes: 1.
Baked Enamel: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint or powder coat. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations, for the following: a.
2.
Interior of cabinet.
Stainless Steel: Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish for the following: a. b.
2.3
Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. Lettering Color: Red. Orientation: Vertical.
Cabinet trim. Door panel.
FABRICATION A.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
B.
Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104413 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
D.
Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
E.
Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104413 - 4 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. 1.3
Product Data. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. 1.4
Warranty: Sample of special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Operation and maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
1.6
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104416 - 1
April 4 2016
Construction Documents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A-80B,C 10-lb. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.
2.2
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Moon-American. Potter Roemer LLC.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
MOUNTING BRACKETS A.
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1.
B.
Manufacturers: By extinguisher manufacturer to coordinate with extinguisher selected.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104416 - 2
April 4 2016
Construction Documents
1. B.
Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
C.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
104416 - 3
April 4 2016
Construction Documents
SECTION 114000 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1 A.
1. 2
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, include General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. As defined, the coordinating trade shall be solely responsible for assigning and dividing the work among the trades as necessary to accomplish the requirements of the Contract Documents. SCOPE
A.
Work in this Section includes furnishing of materials, accessories, and special services necessary to complete foodservice equipment work as Specified herein and where show, scheduled, or reasonably inferred in the Contract Documents.
B.
Provide all labor, materials, services and transportation required to install and complete all Foodservice Equipment indicated on the Contract Documents, ready for final connection by other trades. Include work specified, shown or reasonably inferable as part of Foodservice Equipment.
C.
Portions of this work may be sub-contracted to those qualified to do such work, as may be necessary because of jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions.
D.
Requirements of this Project include minimal inconvenience to the Owner and no interruption in foodservice operations. Submit proposed schedule of sequence and operation, for foodservice equipment removal and/or installation, for approval prior to starting work. Relocation of existing foodservice equipment, from existing kitchen, must be done after new kitchen is completed and occupied. Installation of existing equipment, in new kitchen, must be coordinated with Owner.
E.
Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall submit itemized pricing for each piece of equipment, including separate total prices for delivery and installation. Include all taxes which are applicable to this project as a separate charge. Include all figures in the grand total price of bid proposal.
1. 3
RELATED DIVISIONS / SECTIONS
A.
Division 03 - Floor depressions, reinforced concrete wearing bed and interior finished floor with coved base at prefabricated cold storage assemblies.
B.
Division 03 - Floor depressions to receive stainless steel drain trench liner/grate assemblies (under this Section).
C.
Division 22 - PVC conduit with pull-wire and wide-sweep bends for remote beverage dispensing systems.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 1 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
D.
Division 23 - Supply and exhaust fans for foodservice equipment and exhaust hoods.
E.
Division 22 - Mechanical and Plumbing roughing-in, inter-connection and final connection to Foodservice Equipment.
F.
Division 26 - Electrical roughing-in, inter-connection and final connection to Foodservice Equipment.
1. 4
CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A.
Foodservice Equipment and installation work must comply with applicable laws, statutes, building codes, regulations of public authorities and with the following: 01 ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 02 AGA - American Gas Association Laboratories. 03 ANSI - American National StandardsInstitute. 04 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. 05 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 06 HACCP - Food and Drug Administration Hazard Analysis Critical Control Points Guide lines. 07 NEC - National Electric Code. 08 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 09 NSF - National Sanitation Foundation (equipment to bear certification label). 10 OSHA - Occupational Saftey and Health Administration 11 SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association. 12 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.(equipment to bear certification label).
B.
Furnish certification of regularly-manufactured equipment listing or classification by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. with initial submittal.
1. 5
CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Foodservice Equipment Contractor's qualifications: 01 Five (5) years continuous operation under the same name and ownership. 02 Successfully completed three (3) similar-size and type of projects within the last five (5) years. Submit list with names and telephone numbers of Owner, Architect, Foodservice Consultant, and General Contractor. 03 Technical staff experienced in the preparation of Submittal Data per Article 1._. 04 Technical staff experienced in the procurement and installation of Foodservice Equipment specified in the Contract Documents. 05 Manufacture's authorization to purchase, distribute and install equipment as specified.
B.
01
1. 6 A.
Qualifications for Sub-contractors and Fabricators employed by this Contractor shall comply with Paragraph A of this Article.
SUBSTITUTIONS Base Bid shall consist of equipment items, components and accessories identified in the Contract Document . No "Alternates" or "Substitutions" will be considered in Base Bid. All other manufactures, including any brands which may be listed as "Alternates" or "Approved Equal" must meet or exceed specifications, size, accessories, materials, finishes, etc. of the specified brand.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 2 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B.
Proposed Substitutions: 01 Submit proposed substitutions on bidders letter head no less than 10 calendar days prior to Bid Date. 02 Submit proposed substitutions with specification data and/or manufacturer's shop details indicating all features and accessories required to conform with specified equipment. Also provide a line item list of any deviations from the specified equipment. List of deviations must include equipment description, equipment manufacture's name, model, accessories and features. Deviation(s) must be noted for both specified and proposed alternate equipment. Equipment without listed deviation(s) will be considered to be furnished as specified. Above requirements apply during bidding and contact negotiations. 03 Requests for approval of proposed substitutions will be responded to by Addendum.
C.
Substitutions with prior approval: 01 Submit on Bidder's letterhead attached to Proposal Form. Include individual totals with additive or deductive amounts stipulated and the documentation required in Paragraph B-02. 02 Owner reserves right to accept or reject any or all substitutions proposals before execution of Contract. 03 Provide all design and engineering services required to make adjustments in space, systems, or utilities. Contractor will pay all additional costs of utilities, construction or professional services incurred due to acceptance of any substitution.
1. 7
CLARIFICATION OF DOCUMENTS
A.
Verify and coordinate all items provided in this Section, with drawings, specifications, manufactures requirements, submittals, actual site conditions, adjacent items, and associated work; to assure there are no discrepancies or conflicts. Verification to include, but not limited to, quantities, dimensions, clearances required, direction of operation, door swings, utilities, fabrication details and methods, installation requirements, etc.
B.
Request clarification where discrepancies are discovered between drawings and specifications regarding quality or quantity. Prior to receiving clarification use the higher quality or greater quantity in Base Bid Proposal.
C.
During Bidding: Questions and comments pertaining to Construction Documents' clarity or intent will be responded to by Addendum. Direct all questions and comments to the attention of the Architect.
D.
Subsequent to Award: 01 Confirmation of Construction Document requirements will be provided by Bulletin. 02 Requests For Information Bulletins submitted by Contractor shall contain proposed resolution.
1. 8 A.
SUBMITTAL DATA Preliminary Submittal: Submit three (3) copies of equipment brochures, one (1) reproducible and two (2) prints of all roughing-in and fabrication shop drawings directly to Architect within four weeks after award of contract or issuance of letter of intent. Prints shall be completely legible with black line and white background. Partial submittals will not be accepted or processed.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 3 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B.
Submittal data can be submitted electronically, in PDF format only, if acceptable to the Architect. Only black line drawings will be accepted. Drawing file names must contain equipment item number(s) and submission date. Submit drawing files separated into the following categories: Rough-in drawings, Fabrication drawings, Walk-in and Refrigeration drawings, Ventilator drawings, Underbar equipment drawings, Mobile Serving Line drawings and other equipment requiring shop drawings. Drawings submitted with all categories in one (1) file will be rejected. Data must be submitted per all requirements specified in this ARTICLE and other requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
Brochure Format for Manufactured Equipment: 01 Front and rear protective cover with labeled project name. 02 Front sheet indicating name and address of project, Architect, Foodservice Consultant, General Contractor and Foodservice Equipment Contractor. 03 Table of contents indicating Area designation or Room number, item number, quantity, description and manufacturer. 04 Separate cover sheet for each item of equipment or component indicating: item number, description, quantity, manufacturer, optional equipment, modifications, special instructions and utility requirements. An item of equipment containing, sub-assemblies or components shall have a separate cover sheet for each sub-assembly or component and shall be listed as secondary items in parenthesis beside primary item description. 05 Catalog specification sheet and/or manufacturer's shop drawing with sub-assemblies and components. Photocopies are acceptable providing they are completely legible and contain data as shown on original catalog sheet. 06 Manufacture's shop drawings for flight type dishwashers, dishwashing systems, conveyors, soiled tray return systems, roll-in proofers, roll-in ovens, reel ovens,walk-in cold storage assemblies, utility distribution systems, utensil washers and ventilators. Submit arrangement drawing (plan view and elevation) for underbar equipment. 07 Upon request a certification letter of equipment listing or classification by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.. 08 Samples, from manufacture's available colors, for equipment specified to have color.
D.
Rough-In Drawings: 01 Drawing sheet same size as Contract Documents. Drawings are not to be traced, reproduced or reproduced using electronic files. 02 Contractor's use of electronic files of Contract Drawings for basis of producing submittal drawings is prohibited. Any Contractor using these files assumes total liability and responsibility for accuracy, conformance and verification with the latest Architectural and Engineering drawings, actual field conditions, and all equipment provided. Contractor further assumes responsibility for coordination of their submittals with those of other Contractors and Sub-Contractors. 03 Provide 1/4" scale drawing of Foodservice Equipment and pre-fabricated Cold Storage Assemblies with itemized schedules. 04 Special Conditions Drawings: locate and size the following: a. Floor depressions, cores, sleeves or block-outs. b. Concrete or masonry platforms. c. Pipe sleeves or roof jacks. d. Wall-openings or block-outs for pass-through equipment, recessed panels, in-wall system components, etc. e. Wall blocking grounds or anchor plates required for equipment support/attachment.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 4 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
05 06 07 08
E.
f. Above-ceiling hanger assemblies for support of exhaust hoods, utensil-racks, etc. g. Access panels in walls or ceiling for servicing equipment. h. Ceiling pockets or recesses for high equipment. Electrical Rough-In Drawing. Plumbing Rough-In Drawing. Mechanical Rough-In Drawing. Required Information: a. Foodservice Equipment shown on Contract Drawings. b. Prefabricated Cold Storage Assemblies and Conveyor Dishtable Assemblies shown on Contract Drawings. c. General-use and convenience utilities or services indicated on Contract Drawings, including those required by or connected to equipment or devices not in this Section. d. Rough-ins for equipment shown on Contract Drawings including those labeled Not In Contract, By Owner or Future. e. Rough-in drawings shall be fully dimensioned from finished-room surface to point of stub-up and/or stub-out (not to connection point on equipment ) for all mechanical, electrical and plumbing services. f. Coordinate connection number, tag system, and symbols with Contract Drawings.
Shop Drawings: 01 Drawing sheet same size as Contract Documents. Provide 3/4" scale for plan view and elevations; 1-1/2" scale for sections and construction details. 02 Include Item Number, description and quantity. 03 Illustrate construction details, sections and elevations that reflect requirements of Specifications and Drawings. 04 Shop drawings are to include all information, details and elevations, necessary for production of product, without additional instruction. 05 Submit shop drawings for custom fabricated equipment, conveyor systems, flight type dishwashers, dishwashing systems, conveyors, soiled tray return systems, roll-in proofers, rollin ovens, reel ovens, walk-in cold storage assemblies, utility distribution systems, utensil washers ventilators and specialized equipment consisting of multiple components including serving lines. Submit arrangement drawing (plan view and elevation) for underbar equipment. 06 Indicate manufacture and model numbers of all ancillary components that are part of the fabricated equipment, faucets, drains, drawers, gussets and feet. 07 Illustrate floors, walls, columns and equipment where adjacent to the fabricated fixtures. Illustrate ceilings when clearance or interface is critical to the equipment. 08 Provide outline of all equipment set on, built into or under the fabricated equipment including trash can, knife holder, carts parked in or under equipment and built-in ice bins whether furnished by Foodservice Equipment Contractor or Owner. 09 Coordinate fabrication shop drawings with drawings of ancillary components incorporated into the equipment including food guards and conveyors. Components are to be indicated on the fabrication shop drawings. When production food guards are specified, counter and food guard shop drawings must be coordinated and match design intent. Dimensions should be coordinated, with counter conditions and post locations.Final adjustments can be made during engineering of counter, as long as changes maintain design intent. 10 Submit samples for color selection(s), when required.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 5 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
11
12
F.
1. 9
Include plumbing and electrical schematic drawings for conveyors, waste systems, self-cleaning exhaust hood, exhaust hood fire protection systems, and fabricated fixtures with single electrical or plumbing connection. Indicate mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into fabricated fixtures. Include ventilation and service access required or recommended by manufacturer for service. Access panel size and placement is to permit good ventilation, easy access for lubrication, adjustment or replacement of parts.
Submittal Procedure: 01 After return of one copy of preliminary submittal, if all or any part has been rejected, resubmit as instructed for approval. 02 Follow routine procedures specified elsewhere or as directed. 03 Contractor is to thoroughly review all data and material for compliance prior to submittal. Repetitive review time incurred by Consultant due to the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement may be invoiced to this Contractor at Consultant's standard hourly rates. VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION
A.
Utilities Rough-In Drawings: Within four weeks after award of contract or notice-to-proceed, review Contract Documents and Submittal Data for accuracy and completeness. Coordinate work with other sub-contractors and field-check installed utility locations and capacities. Submit written notification to Architect of conflicts and required adjustments.
B.
Dimension Responsibility: Attain actual measurements for proper fit of equipment. When actual measurements for proper fit are not available, in time to meet the required delivery schedule, Contractor must provide, to General Contractor, accurate equipment templates. Templates constructed of stable material, for equipment that requires precise area requirements, so building walls and floors can be constructed to accommodate equipment. Mark exact location of front and back edges of toe base on top of template and show dimension of toe base set back. Coordinate template delivery time with General Contractor and provide use instructions for templates. Indicate on shop drawings, equipment requiring templates, that templates are being provided. Dimensions in Contract Documents are approximate and are as accurate as can be determined. Field-check all measurements and conditions at building prior to fabrication or delivery of equipment. Submit written notification to Architect of all conflicts or deviation from dimensions shown. Proper fit of fabricate equipment to walls, adjacent equipment and equipment fitting contour of walls including fitting corners at angle of walls, is a maximum gap of 1/4" . Failure to obtain proper fit of equipment may result in rejection of equipment. Excessive use of trim pieces will not be acceptable.
C.
Scheduling to Fit Openings: When necessary to schedule construction of walls or partitions prior to delivery of fixed equipment, equipment must be fabricated for passage through finished openings. Contractor to maintain contact with project and be knowledgeable of all conditions including vertical handling limitations within building and possible hoisting requirements. Coordinate all procedures with General Contractor.
D.
Refrigerated and Dry Storage Areas: Coordinate dimensions to accommodate scheduled modular shelving sections. Submit written notification to Architect of variance between Contract Documents and actual conditions.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 6 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
E.
Size/Weight Coordination: Verify serviceware size/weight information with Owner. Coordinate information with silverware dispensers, self-leveling dispensers and transport equipment.
F.
Movable Equipment: Mobile equipment required to fit through or into fixed equipment is to be reviewed and coordinated for compatibility at time of submittal preparation. Submit written notification of conflicts and required adjustments.
G.
Relocation of Work: Relocate or re-route work as required to coordinate with construction schedule without charge.
1. 10
OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A.
Coordinate utilities requirements of OF/CI equipment with building utilities and roughing-in drawings.
B.
Receive at job-site and fully incorporate into installation procedures as if furnished under this Section.
1. 11
WARRANTY
A.
Unless otherwise noted in General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Documents, items furnished are to be fully guaranteed against defects in workmanship, materials, and functionality as follows.
B.
Provide manufacture's written parts and labor warranty, for all equipment furnished in this section as follows: 01 One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion 02 Four (4) year extended replacement warranty on all refrigeration compressor units.
C.
Components of equipment subject to replacement prior to one-year's use and items which may fail due to improper or inadequate periodic maintenance are not intended to be included within this warranty.
D.
Provide one (1) year service available within twenty-four hours of notification for refrigeration systems and/or equipment. First year labor costs covered by Warranty.
E.
Provide the following for walk-in cooler and freezer vault(s) and refrigeration system(s): 01 One (1) year refrigeration service, at no charge, available within twenty-four hours of notification. 02 Five (5) year manufacture's registered written replacement, warranty certificate, covering compressor bodies. First year labor costs covered by Warranty. 03 Ten (10) year manufacture's registered written replacement/repair, warranty certificate, covering walk-in panels. Warranty to cover defects in material and workmanship. First year labor costs covered by Warranty. 04 One (1) year parts and labor warranty for all components of refrigeration system(s) and walkin vault(s) not otherwise covered herein.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 7 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
F.
Warranty periods are from date of Substantial Completion or issue date of Certificate Of Occupancy. Should Temporary Certificate of Occupancy be issued for partial completion of work, items furnished within that designated area are to be under warranty from date of Certificate.
G.
Furnish a list of all equipment and its respective local service agent, per Article 3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1
MATERIAL/COMPONENTS
A.
Stainless Steel Sheets: 01 18-8, Type 304, polished to 180 grit, No. 4 finish. 02 Stainless steel joints and seams: Heli-arc welded, free of pits, flaws, ground smooth and polished to No. 4 finish. 03 Stainless steel horizontal surfaces: Grain direction is longitudinal including backsplash. Rightangle corners of fixtures shall be polished to provide a mitered appearance.
B.
Galvanized Iron Sheets: 01 Armco copper bearing Zinc Grip or Zinc Grip/Paint Grip. 02 Galvanized iron joint and seams: Arc-welded, free of pits and flaws and ground smooth. 03 Galvanized sheets or shapes: Washed with mineral spirits and primed with Rustoleum enamel in color selected by Architect.
C.
Sound Deadening: 01 Component Hardware "Tacky Tape", 3/4" wide rope, positioned continuously between all underbracing or frame members and underside of stainless steel surface. Tighten stud-bolts for maximum compression of sealant and trim excess.
D.
Casters: 01 Provide fabricated fixtures with "Open Base" construction with Jarvis & Jarvis model 5-S40-213BP-19A, 5" dia., stem mounted, NSF approved, ball bearing, 300lb. capacity, swivel casters with stainless steel yokes, polyolefin wheels and grey polyurethane tires. Unless otherwise specified provide two (2) casters with model SS-E65 brakes. Provide all casters with model C60-1012, 7" rolling bumpers with stainless steel top discs. 02 Provide fabricated fixtures with "Closed Base" construction with Jarvis & Jarvis model 5-S30-213BP-2, 5" dia., plate mounted, NSF approved, ball bearing, 300lb. capacity, swivel casters with stainless steel yokes, polyolefin wheels and grey polyurethane tires. Unless otherwise specified provide two (2) casters with model SS-E65 brakes. Provide all casters with model C60-1012, 7".
E.
Identification Plates: 01 Prohibited Information: Names of suppliers and contractors. 02 Required Information: Function or purpose of controls and switches. 03 Plate Construction: Engraved phenolic plastic, secured to equipment with epoxy cement or stainless steel screws. Furnish samples.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 8 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
2. 2
PLUMBING/MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories: 01 Control valves, vacuum breakers, pressure regulators for water, gas, and steam as required for operation of Foodservice Equipment. Plumbing fittings and components to be chromeplated where exposed. 02 Faucets and drains with connected overflows for all sinks. 03 Specialty Foodservice water-fill faucets or hose assemblies per Contract Documents. 04 Shock absorbers for Foodservice Equipment with quick-opening or solenoid-operated water valves. 05 Piping brackets and supports within fabricated equipment. 06 14 gauge stainless steel panel for control valves mounted on Open Base fixtures with 2-1/2" setback from counter top edge/rim to control handle. Submit design for approval.
B.
Final Plumbing Connections: 01 Pre-pipe fabricated equipment containing components, fittings and/or devices required to be connected to building systems. Pre-pipe each component, fitting or device to a utility compartment for final connection. Refer to Utility Connection Plan for capacities. 02 Field-assembled equipment shall have plumbing components completely interconnected under this Section ready for final connection as indicated on Utility Connection Plan. 03 Tag plumbing final connection points of equipment with the following: a Item number. b Name of devices or components. c Type of utility.
C.
Ducts: 01 Furnish 18 gauge stainless steel 2" high duct collar for final connection to duct system for exhaust hoods which are furred-in to ceiling.
2. 3
PLUMBING TRIM
A.
Faucets: Furnish for sinks or equipment specified under this Section requiring open water supply. Faucets furnished under this Section to be lead free and comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Section 9 requirements. Faucets specified in 2.13 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE.
B.
Drains: Furnish for sinks or equipment specified under this Section requiring removal of liquids. Install specified chrome-plated or stainless steel fittings with washers and locknuts in die-stamped opening. Drains specified in 2.13 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE.
2. 4
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Certify electrical systems, components and accessories specified under this Section to be in compliance with NEC 70.
B.
Electrical Components: 01 Coordinate foodservice equipment voltage, phase and loads with building system. Confirm existing equipment electrical requirements.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 9 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
C.
Cord and Caps: 01 Coordinate Foodservice Equipment cord/caps with related receptacles. 02 120 volt equipment shall have Type S0 or SJ0 cord and plug with ground wire fastened to frame/body. 03 Adjust cord lengths on fixed equipment to eliminate loose-hanging excess.
D.
Controls: 01 Provide motor-driven appliance or electrically-heated unit with control switch or starter per Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. with low-voltage and overload protection. 02 Disposer controls recess-mounted in wall: Remove external fittings and accessories from enclosure and furnish with 16 gauge stainless steel perimeter angle flange with welded corners. Install control at 4'-0" aff to bottom of enclosure. 03 Disposer controls recess-mounted in counter-splash risers: Remove external fittings and accessories from NEMA 4 enclosure and furnished with 16 gauge stainless steel perimeter angle flange with welded corners. Install control at 1'-3" above counter top, to bottom of enclosure. Provide panel with 48" long coil of Seal-Tite electrical conduit, from bottom of control panel for final field connections under Division 16. 04 Provide NEMA Type 4 enclosure with remote manual starters, magnetic contactors or starters and push-button stations. NEMA Type 1 enclosure only when installed in a closed base body. 05 Provide 208/240 volt and 460/480 volt equipment or devices with integral, pre-wired stepdown transformer to supply 120 volt control circuit.
E.
Motors: 01 120 volt motors: Manual tumbler type starter with thermal overload protection and interchangeable heating elements. 02 208/240 volt and 460/480 volt motors: Magnetic starter with low-voltage protection and one interchangeable overload relay per phase.
F.
Heating Elements: 01 Electrically-heated equipment: Thermostatic controls. 02 Water heating equipment: Equip with positive low-water shut-off.
G.
Receptacles: 01 Closed Body Base Receptacles: Mount in Component Hardware model R73-1210 recessed housing. 02 Pre-wire receptacles in closed body base to a junction box installed within 6" above bottom of utility or compressor compartments. 03 Open Body Base Receptacles: Mount on 14 gauge stainless steel panel, 12" x 10-1/2" x 4-1/2" deep, with returned ends and sloping recess. Submit design for approval. Secure panel to underbracing of top. 04 Pre-wire receptacles on open body base fixtures, to a junction box, mounted on underside of lower shelf. Install vertical wiring in rigid conduit or within tubular leg. 05 Fabricated Equipment Receptacles: Hubbell, Inc. assemblies horizontally-mounted in a metal box with stainless steel cover plate installed in/on fabricated equipment. 06 Fabricated Equipment Switches: Hubbell, Inc. with metal box and Sierra Model NO. C-361 stainless steel cover plate installed in/on fabricated equipment. 07 Pre-wired switches to controlled device(s) and to a junction box installed within 6" above bottom of utility or compressor compartment.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 10 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
08
Refrigeration System Switches: Installed within compressor compartment near door opening.
H.
Load Centers: 01 Pre-wire load centers installed on fabricated equipment to have all fixture components wired to load center with balanced phase loading. Load center wired complete and ready for final connection by Division 26. Mount load center(s) within utility compartment(s), per code requirements. 02 List all breaker/device information, typewritten, on circuit schedule in load center door with enclosed schematic wiring diagram of fixture components.
I.
Light Fixtures: 01 Pre-wire light fixtures with lamps installed on fabricated or field-assembled equipment to a junction box for final connection. Install light fixtures in continuous-run when specified. 02 Install fluorescent display light fixtures with stud bolts full-length of display stand and serving shelf. Pre-wire through support posts to an apron-mounted switch. 03 Install heat lamps with stud bolts to underside of serving shelf. Provide maximum length lamp chassis, when multiple heat lamps are specified. Install switches and infinite controls remote from lamps. 04 Connect cold storage light fixtures through hub fitting located on top of fixture. Seal hub, airtight at exterior side of walk-in panel. Install all horizontal conduit above ceiling panels. Install plastic sleeve through ceiling panels for electrical conduit. Seal sleeved penetrations airtight at both sides of panel. 05 Install bulbs in Foodservice Equipment containing a light fixture. 06 Refrigerator and Heated Cabinets provide G.E. Model No. 40A15 appliance bulbs. 07 Provide Shat-R-Shield lamps or standard lamps sleeved with end caps for exposed fluorescent or LED lamps within a food zone.
J.
Final Electrical Connection: 01 Pre-wire fabricated equipment containing electrically-operated components, fittings and/or devices to be direct-connected to building systems. Pre-wire each component, fitting or group thereof to a junction box for final connection. Refer to drawings for circuit loading. 02 Fabricated equipment containing electrically-operated components and/or devices indicated to have a circuit-breaker load center shall have each component or device prewired to a separate circuit breaker for balanced phase loading and single final connecting point. 03 Field-assembled equipment shall have electrical components completely pre-wired to single connecting point(s) as indicated on Utility Connection Drawings. 04 Prewire electrical devices of cold storage assembly to a top-mounted junction box for final connection per compartment grouping. a Light fixtures and switches; heated pressure-relief vent. b Door/jamb heaters and temperature monitors/alarms. 05 Tag electrical final connection points of equipment with the following: a Item number. b Name of devices on circuit. c Total electrical load. d Voltage and phase.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 11 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
2. 5
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
A.
Install complete with all refrigerant, oil, dials, dehydrators, gauges, controls are required for proper operation of system.
B.
Refrigerants must be non-ozone depleting type.
C.
Check and adjust self-contained or factory-installed compressors to proper operating temperature. Operating temperature to comply with FDA and HACCP guidelines.
2. 6 A.
FABRICATED EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES Approved manufacturers of fabricated food service equipment: Jero Manufacturing, Inc. 5117 South 100th E. Ave. Tulsa, Oklahoma 74145 Keas Stainless Steel Fabricators, Inc. 4312 S.E. 31st Del City, Oklahoma 73115 Stainless Innovations 1110 Carnall Fort Smith, Arkansas 72901 Complete Restaurant Services 2668 Myrtle Springs Avenue Dallas, Texas 75220 Kemlee Manufacturing, Inc. 1404 Industrial Park Galena, Kansas 66739
B.
All fixtures within this Section are to be constructed by single manufacturer and of uniform design and finish.
C.
All custom fabricated equipment must be built in NSF approved shop and bear NSF label.
D.
All custom fabricated refrigerated equipment must be built in NSF approved shop, meet NSF-7standards and bear NSF label.
E.
All custom fabricated equipment with electrical and/or plumbing components must be built in U.L. approved shop and bear U.L. mark, manufacture's name, word "LISTED", product name and control number. U.L. mark must be U.L. approved label with manufacture's name, U. L. identification, address and electrical characteristics pre-printed on label. Install label where accessible for viewing but not where it will receive abuse.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 12 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
F.
Pre-wire counter and components to circuit breaker load centers in utility compartment. Square D QO series, circuit breaker load center with main breaker, cover, ground bar kit and Visi-trip breakers. Load center to have 20% spare capacity.
G.
Mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into a fabricated fixture must have ventilation and service access required or recommended by manufacturer. Service access panel size and placement is to permit easy lubrication, adjustment or replacement of parts and is to be indicated on fabrication shop drawings.
2. 7
FIELD JOINTS
A.
Stainless steel tops, edges and splashes are to be fully welded, ground and polished to No. 4 finish and match adjacent surface.
B.
Provide field joints only when equipment size must be limited for access into building.
C.
Terminate field weld of inaccessible vertical field joint in backsplash of fixture 1" above horizontal coved corner. Remaining height of field joint is to be a hairline butt joint with offset draw-angle behind. Note field joint type and location on shop drawings.
2. 8
FOOD WELLS
A.
Remote-mount food well controls in recessed apron panel. Control panel is recessed 2" from body line. Mount panel on concealed piano hinge at bottom edge; secure with screws at upper corners.
B.
Manifold food well drains and extend to within utility compartment for indirect waste connection. Install valve in drain line and extend handle through compartment door or as specified in this Section. Provide individual brass or hi-temp plastic "pull-out" drain plugs for each food well.
C.
Enclose underside of food wells with removable 18 gauge stainless steel louvered panel.
D.
Provide well(s) On-Off control or master On-Off switch to shut off all wells.
2. 9
VENTILATOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A.
Install fire suppression system(s) in ventilators specified in this section. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes or standards. Submit installation certification to Architect.
B.
Install automatic chemical system in each filtered exhaust hood and duct assembly. Provide surface protection above/in all equipment required by NFPA Bulletin No. 96 and local Fire Marshall's regulations. Refer to Contract Drawings for quantity of exhaust fan units serving single or multiple exhaust hoods and coordinate with hood/fan controls.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 13 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
C.
Locate chemical cylinders as indicated on drawings and install piping to exhaust hood(s) in totally-concealed manner. Set top of cylinder cabinet flush with ceiling. Provide polished chrome plated tubing piping and fittings, where exposed at cylinder cabinet and interior of exhaust ventilator. Exposed pipe threads are not allowed in or above food zone.
D.
System components: Ansul Model No. "PIRANHA", system assemblies, in system increments required by dimensions and configuration of foodservice equipment and ventilators. System to comply with U.L. 300 test standards and bear label.
E.
Remote manual release located in path of egress from protected exhaust hood area. Install all conduit and remote pull so only face of pull is visible in wall.
F.
Each System: Ansul Automan cylinder control assembly with four (4) snap-action electric switches.
G.
Fusible links installed each duct collar of filtered hood/ducts.
H.
Fusible links located directly above each cooking appliance required by Code, in quantity required by length of protected appliance.
I.
"Quik-Seal" adaptor fitting at all ventilator penetrations for distribution pipes or detection lines.
J.
Required quantity and sizes of mechanically-operated gas valves.
2. 10
REGULARLY MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
A.
Regularly manufactured equipment and components must be built to NSF standards and bear NSF label.
B.
Provide standard finishes and accessories unless otherwise specified per Contract Documents.
C.
Provide manufacture's most current model, version and style of specified equipment. When primary model has been discontinued provide manufacture's subsequent model with size, function, finish, features, accessories and approvals as specified equipment.
D.
Equipment of like categories shall be the same brand and manufacturer unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
2. 11
FABRICATED AND FIELD-ASSEMBLED EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide equipment in arrangement and configuration as shown on Plans, Elevations and Detail Drawings.
B.
Field welding and assembly of fabricated equipment to be performed by manufacturer of equipment.
2. 12
Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS for components, fittings, accessories, and requirements related to manufactured and fabricated equipment listed.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 14 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
2. 13
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
BASE BID Cafe Items No. C01 through C52
CAFE ITEM NO.
C01 WALK-IN COOLER / FREEZER
A One (1) Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
C02 WALK-IN SHELVING
A One (1) lot - Eagle Group, "QuadTruss" with"EAGLEgard" epoxy finish. Free standing section with five (5) shelves and four (4) 86" posts. B Sections: 01 One (1) 14" x 42" 02 Two (2) 21" x 36" 03 Two (2) 21" x 42" 04 Six (6) 21" x 48". C Special Instructions: 01 Set bottom shelf 10" AFF and all others 17" O.C. ITEM NO.
C03 STORAGE SHELVING
A One (1) lot - Eagle Group, "QuadTruss" with"EAGLEgard" epoxy finish. Free standing section with five (5) shelves and four (4) 86" posts. B Sections: 01 One (1) 14" x 48" 02 Six (6) 21" x 42" 03 Three (3) 21" x 48". C Special Instructions: 01 Set bottom shelf 10" AFF and all others 17" O.C. ITEM NO.
C04 VEGETABLE PREPARATION TABLE
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model TSE-BS MODIFIED, size and shape per drawings. B To include: 01 Work surface 34" AFF. 02 14 ga., type 304 stainless steel top with square edges. 03 6" high splash at rear. 04 Two (2)16" x 20" x 14" deep sink compartments. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 15 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Open structure stainless steel base. 18 ga., type 304 stainless steel undershelf where unobstructed. Parking space in base for trash can. Corner legs with flanged feet. Fully weld open structure base and undershelves. Flanged foot where required by the contract documents. 14 ga., type 304 stainless steel bracket below top for mounting knife rack. Construct per detail. Model WS12120-16/3 wall mounted shelf. Wall mounted on cantilever brackets 21" above top.
C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Component Hardware, model KL51-9012-SE1, deck mount, faucet with12" swing spout. 02 Nemco, model 56050-1, can opener. 03 Two (2) Component Hardware, model DSS-8015, lever drain assembly. 04 Edlund, model KR-699, knife rack. D Special instructions: 01 Mount can opener to table top, per drawings. 02 Anchor table to floor. ITEM NO.
C05 FREEZER
A One (1) - Continental Refrigerator, model 1F-SA-HD. B To Include: 01 Half height doors. 02 Hinge doors per drawings. 03 One (1) extra shelf. 04 Cord and plug. 05 6" high stainless steel legs and adjustable feet. C Special Instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. ITEM NO.
C06 MOBILE SLICER STAND
A One (1) - Piper Products, model 331-3424. B To Include: 01 5" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. ITEM NO.
C07 SLICER
A One (1) - Hobart, model HS8N. B To Include: 01 Non-removable knife. C Special Instructions: 01 Install on Item No. C06, Mobile Slicer Stand.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 16 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C08 VENTILATOR W/ FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A One (1) - CaptiveAire Systems, model 6030ND-2-PSP-F, exhaust-only wall canopy with ceiling mounted perforated supply air plenum. Unit 5'-0" wide x length per drawings. B To include: 01 18 ga., type 304, stainless steel construction. 02 Constructed in accordance with NFPA 96. 03 ETL listed and bear label. 04 ETL Sanitation listed and bear label. 05 Fully weld exhaust air plenum. 06 Recessed, vapor-proof, fluorescent, 32W, light fixtures with bulbs. Provide remote touch-screen control panel for lights and fans. Inter-connect lights between junction boxes on multi-section ventilators. Provide single point electrical connection for final hook-up. Conceal all conduit. Ventilator provided with three (3) lineal feet of light fixture per each 4'-0" of length. 07 Captrate Solo stainless steel filters. ETL Listed. 08 Insulate supply air plenum. 09 Air dampers at interior of supply air plenum. 10 Supply air grilles sized to provide air velocity as recommended by manufacture. 11 CaptiveAire Smart Controls, Thermostatic Control, to automatically activate the ventilator fans when cooking occurs. Inter-wire system to sensor(s). System installed in stainless steel utility cabinet, mounted on wall. Division 26 to wire components per manufactures recommendations. Final connection to power and connection to fan contact by Division 26. Contact by Division 26. 12 Pipe chase at ventilator ends for gas supply lines. Chase bottom closed with cut-out for gas pipe. 13 Stainless steel angle trim at ceiling as required. One piece corners. 14 Stainless steel closure panels to ceiling as required. One piece corners. 15 Fire suppression system Ansul , "PIRANHA", chemical, automatic system, in accordance with codes, ordinances, manufactures recommendations and per PART 2 -PRODUCTS, Ventilator Fire Suppression Systems. Provide required surface protection, fuel shut-off devise(s) and micro switches. 16 Stainless steel wall panels at ventilator(s) where adjacent to walls: a Construct panels of 18 ga. 304, stainless steel. Apply fire rated contact cement to stainless steel panel and to wall. Install on walls as shown on drawings. Extend panels from bottom of ventilator to top of base and 18" beyond each end of ventilator. Finished panels extended to ceiling where out from under the ventilator. b Construct panel section in equal widths. Minimum panel width 24", except at ends. End panels must be equal width but not less than 12". At corner turns form panel with 1/4" radius and return to adjacent wall. Corner returns shall be a minimum of 6" wide. c Minimize vertical joints. No horizontal joints. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Component Hardware, model J60-2260, 1" wide, flat stainless steel snap-on molding over all vertical joints and at edges where panels terminate. D Special instructions: 01 Installation must be supervised by factory personnel or factory authorized personnel.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 17 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
02
03 04
Provide test of ventilator exhaust and make-up air system air volumes to determine compliance with design requirements. Contractor must comply with provisions of state and local codes and ordinances, during testing. Submit data to Architect. Hang with ½" dia. steel hanger rods and turn buckles. Provide required structural members to suspend ventilator from overhead structure. Set ventilator lower front edge 6'-8" AFF.
ITEM NO.
C09 MOBILE RANGE
A One (1) - Jade Range, model JBR-4-24, range with oven, natural gas. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel front and sides. 02 Model JBR 6-S stainless steel 6" wide spreader. 03 Model R-36-BIST stainless steel high flue riser. 04 Rear gas connection. 05 Gas pressure regulator valve. 06 5" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model HG-4D-48SK, 3/4" I.D., plastic coated 48" long, flexible gas hoses and quick disconnect assembly. 02 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model K kit, including restraining device. D Special Instructions: 01 Anchor restraining device to range and wall. 02 Furnish hose and quick disconnect assembly to Division 22 for installation. ITEM NO.
C10 SALAMANDER BROILER
A One (1) - Jade Range, model JBR-JB36-WM, natural gas. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel front, sides, bottom and top. 02 Rear gas connection. 03 Gas pressure regulator valve. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Provide 14 ga., type 304 stainless steel, 2" x 2" square tubing, horizontal supports. Extend salamander broiler supports from wall. Ends of supports, fully welded, closed. Reinforce wall to support salamander broiler. Set salamander broiler forward 6" from wall. D Special Instructions: 01 Install salamander broiler on wall behind equipment. Include all accessories required to make installation. 02 Set bottom of salamander broiler 55" AFF. 03 Submit shop drawing of supports. 04 Install salamander broiler above Item No. C12, Mobile Griddle.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 18 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C11 MOBILE CHAR-BROILER
A One (1) - Jade Range, model JB-30, natural gas. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel front, sides and plate shelf. 02 6" side and back extensions. 03 Round bar top grate with fish spacing. 04 Safety pilot. 05 Rear gas connection. 06 Gas pressure regulator valve. 07 Stainless steel tubular base with 16 ga., type 304 stainless steel undershelf fully welded to legs. 08 5" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model HG-4D-48SK, 3/4" I.D., plastic coated 48" long, flexible gas hoses and quick disconnect assembly. 02 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model K kit, including restraining device. D Special Instructions: 01 Anchor char-broiler to stand. 02 Anchor restraining device to char-broiler and wall. 03 Furnish hose and quick disconnect assembly to Division 22 for installation. ITEM NO.
C12 MOBILE GRIDDLE
A One (1) - Jade Range, model JGT-2448, natural gas. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel front, sides and plate shelf. 02 Thermostatically controlled. 03 Safety pilot. 04 Rear gas connection. 05 Gas pressure regulator valve. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model HG-4D-48SK, 3/4" I.D., plastic coated 48" long, flexible gas hoses and quick disconnect assembly. 02 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model K kit, including restraining device. D Special Instructions: 01 Install griddle to Item No. C13, Mobile Refrigerated Equipment Stand. 02 Anchor restraining device to griddle and wall. 03 Furnish hose and quick disconnect assembly to Division 22 for installation. ITEM NO.
C13 MOBILE REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND
A One (1) - Continental Refrigerator, model DL-48G.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 19 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B To Include: 01 16 GA., type 304 stainless steel top with drip guard marine edge. 02 Cord and plug. 03 3" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Two (2) Vollrath, model 90062, 6" deep, full size stainless steel pans. D Special Instructions: 01 Anchor Item No. C12, Mobile Griddle to top of base. 02 Submit shop drawing of refrigerated base. ITEM NO.
C14 MOBILE FRYER W/ FILTER
A One (1) - Pitco, model SG14RS fryer battery, natural gas, per drawings. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel fat container. 02 Stainless steel front, door and sides 03 Electronic ignition with drain valve interlock. 04 Digital controls with melt cycle. 05 Multi-cabinet unit. 06 Model BNB dump station with stainless steel pan and screen. 07 Stainless steel lift-off covers for fryers and dump station. 08 Oil reclamation system for liquid shortening. 09 Single point rear gas connection. 10 "T" gas manifold. 11 Gas pressure regulator valve. 12 9" adjustable polyurethane casters with front locking brakes. 13 One (1) case filter paper part # A7025301. 14 One (1) case filter powder part # PP10733. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model HG-4F-48SK, 1 1/4" I.D., plastic coated 48" long, flexible gas hoses and quick disconnect assembly. 02 T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model K kit, including restraining device. D Special Instructions: 01 Anchor restraining device to fryer and wall. 02 Furnish hose and quick disconnect assembly to Division 22 for installation. ITEM NO.
C15 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C16 VENTILATOR W/ FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A One (1) - CaptiveAire Systems, model 6030ND-2-PSP-F, exhaust-only wall canopy with ceiling mounted perforated supply air plenum. Unit 5'-0" wide x length per drawings.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 20 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B To include: 01 18 ga., type 304, stainless steel construction. 02 Constructed in accordance with NFPA 96. 03 ETL listed and bear label. 04 ETL Sanitation listed and bear label. 05 Fully weld exhaust air plenum. 06 Recessed, vapor-proof, fluorescent, 32W, light fixtures with bulbs. Provide remote touch-screen control panel for lights and fans. Inter-connect lights between junction boxes on multi-section ventilators. Provide single point electrical connection for final hook-up. Conceal all conduit. Ventilator provided with three (3) lineal feet of light fixture per each 4'-0" of length. 07 Captrate Solo stainless steel filters. ETL Listed. 08 Insulate supply air plenum. 09 Air dampers at interior of supply air plenum. 10 Supply air grilles sized to provide air velocity as recommended by manufacture. 11 CaptiveAire Smart Controls, Thermostatic Control, to automatically activate the ventilator fans when cooking occurs. Inter-wire system to sensor(s). System installed in stainless steel utility cabinet, mounted on wall. Division 26 to wire components per manufactures recommendations. Final connection to power and connection to fan contact by Division 26. Contact by Division 26. 12 Pipe chase at ventilator ends for gas supply lines. Chase bottom closed with cut-out for gas pipe. 13 Stainless steel angle trim at ceiling as required. One piece corners. 14 Stainless steel closure panels to ceiling as required. One piece corners. 15 Fire suppression system Ansul , "PIRANHA", chemical, automatic system, in accordance with codes, ordinances, manufactures recommendations and per PART 2 -PRODUCTS, Ventilator Fire Suppression Systems. Provide required surface protection, fuel shut-off devise(s) and micro switches. 16 Stainless steel wall panels at ventilator(s) where adjacent to walls: a Construct panels of 18 ga. 304, stainless steel. Apply fire rated contact cement to stainless steel panel and to wall. Install on walls as shown on drawings. Extend panels from bottom of ventilator to top of base and 18" beyond each end of ventilator. Finished panels extended to ceiling where out from under the ventilator. b Construct panel section in equal widths. Minimum panel width 24", except at ends. End panels must be equal width but not less than 12". At corner turns form panel with 1/4" radius and return to adjacent wall. Corner returns shall be a minimum of 6" wide. c Minimize vertical joints. No horizontal joints. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Component Hardware, model J60-2260, 1" wide, flat stainless steel snap-on molding over all vertical joints and at edges where panels terminate. D Special instructions: 01 Installation must be supervised by factory personnel or factory authorized personnel. 02 Provide test of ventilator exhaust and make-up air system air volumes to determine compliance with design requirements. Contractor must comply with provisions of state and local codes and ordinances, during testing. Submit data to Architect. 03 Hang with ½" dia. steel hanger rods and turn buckles. Provide required structural members to suspend ventilator from overhead structure. 04 Set ventilator lower front edge 6'-8" AFF. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 21 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C17 MOBILE CONVECTION OVEN
A One (1) - Southbend, model SLGS-22CCH, natural gas. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel front, sides and top. 02 Solid state digital controls. 03 Cook-&-Hold control. 04 Two speed fan with fan delay and pulse plus. 05 Gas pressure regulator valve for each oven. 06 5" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Two (2) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model HG-4C-48SK, 1/2" I.D., plastic coated 48" long, flexible gas hoses and quick disconnect assembly. 02 Two (2) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc., "Safe-T-Link" model K kit, including restraining device. D Special Instructions: 01 Do not manifold gas line to oven decks. 02 Anchor restraining device to oven and wall. 03 Furnish hose and quick disconnect assembly to Division 22 for installation. ITEM NO.
C18 COOLING RACK
A Two (2) - Cres-Cor, model 207-1820. B To Include: 01 Perimeter bumper. 02 Polyurethane tired casters. ITEM NO.
C19 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C20 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C21 WORK TABLE
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model TSE-BS MODIFIED, size and shape per drawings. B To include: 01 Work surface 34" AFF. 02 14 ga., type 304 stainless steel top with square edges. 03 6" high splash at rear. 04 Open structure stainless steel base. 05 18 ga., type 304 stainless steel undershelf where unobstructed. 06 Fully weld open structure base and undershelves.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 22 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
C Special instructions: 01 Install Item No. C24, Drawer Warmer into base. ITEM NO.
C22 MICROWAVE OVEN
A One (1) - Panasonic, model NE-1064F. B To Include: 01 Cord and plug. C Special instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. 02 Install on Item No. C21, Work Table. ITEM NO.
C23 CONVEYOR TOASTER
A One (1) - Hatco, model TQ-400H. B To Include: 01 3" opening height. 02 Automatic Power Saver Mode 03 Cord and plug. C Special instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. 02 Install on Item No. C21, Work Table. ITEM NO.
C24 DRAWER WARMER
A One (1) - Hatco, model HDW-2. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel finish. 02 Cord and plug. C Special Instructions: 01 Secure to undershelf of Item No. C21, Work Table. 02 Install so removable for service. 03 Restrain excess cord length. ITEM NO.
C25 CHEF'S TABLE
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model HT3OB-208. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel top and body finish. 02 8" wide poly cutting board. 03 Cord and plug with matching electrical receptacle.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 23 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
C Special Instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. 02 Furnish electrical receptacle to Division 26 for installation. ITEM NO.
C26 MOBILE REFRIGERATED SANDWICH UNIT
A One (1) - Continental Refrigerator, model SW60-16-FB. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel insulated roll-top pan cover. 02 Stainless steel top, front and doors. 03 Aluminum sides and interior. 04 Full length 12" wide cutting board. 05 Sixteen (16) 1/6th size, 4" deep pans with divider bars. 06 Hinge doors per drawings. 07 Cord and plug. 08 3 5/8" high caster set. ITEM NO.
C27 PASS-SHELF
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To include: 01 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel pass-thru shelf with "V" edge on pick-up side, per detail. Turn all edges straight down and fully weld corners. 02 Provide 14 ga. stainless steel hat channel underbracing stud-bolted to shelf. Provide 14 ga. stainless steel shelf supports under bottom of shelf to stabilize shelf at wall, per detail. 03 Frame window opening with 18 ga. stainless steel, fully welded, trim on both sides per detail. ITEM NO.
C28 HEAT STRIP
A Two (2) - Hatco, model GRAH-54. B To Include: 01 Toggle switch. 02 Adjustable angle brackets. C Special Instructions: 01 Install heat lamps in window opening above pick-up shelf, per details. ITEM NO.
C29 BACK-UP COUNTER
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model PC18144SE-CS MODIFIED, size and shape per drawings. B To include: 01 Work surface 34" AFF. 02 14 ga., type 304 stainless steel top with square edges. 03 Open cabinet stainless steel base. 04 Bottom and intermediate shelves. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 24 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Stainless steel apron enclosure with removable bottom panel at soup wells. Fully weld cabinet base and undershelves. Stainless steel legs with adjustable feet. Corner legs with flanged feet. Manifold soup well drain lines to common connection point. Provide drain valve assembly with brass gate valve. Install handle in stainless steel panel in body. Extend drain line and terminate above floor drain. Pre-wire soup wells to junction box in base. Mount soup well control in apron enclosure.
C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Two (2) Eagle Products, model 7QDI-240D, 208V-1ph soup well with drain. D Special instructions: 01 Anchor counter to floor. ITEM NO.
C30 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C31 CASH REGISTER
A Two (2) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C32 SERVING COUNTER
A One (1) - By Division 06. ITEM NO.
C33 REFRIGERATED DISPLAY CASE
A One (1) - Federal Industries, model RSSM-360SC, self-contained. B To Include: 01 Horizontal top light. 02 Two (2) stainless steel shelves with lights below. 03 Stainless steel deck. 04 Reflective end glass. 05 Black interior back panel. 06 Black exterior rear finish. 07 Rear access door. Hinge door per drawings. 08 Rollco security roll-up cover. 09 Condensate evaporator pan. 10 Cord and plug. 11 Plastic laminate exterior finish. Color selected, by Architect, from manufacture's standard colors. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Filler panels size and shape per detail. Construct of ½" MDFX board with black plastic laminate finish on all exposed surfaces. Mount on 14 ga. stainless steel, channel shaped, toe base per details. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 25 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
D Special instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. ITEM NO.
C34 BEVERAGE COUNTER
A One (1) - By Division 06. ITEM NO.
C35 COFFEE MAKER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C36 CUP DISPENSER
A Two (2) - Dispense-Rite, model CTC-R-4SS. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel finish. 02 Counter top mount. C Special Instructions: 01 Verify Owner's cup size(s). 02 Install on Item No. C34, Beverage Counter. ITEM NO.
C37 ICE & BEVERAGE DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C38 ICED TEA BREWER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C39 CONDIMENT DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C40 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C41 BAG RACK
A Two (2) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C42 WALL SHELF
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To Include: 01 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, fully welded, wall mounted shelf on cantilever brackets.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 26 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
C Section: 01 One (1) 18" x 60" D Special Instructions: 01 Coordinate mounting height of shelf with Item No. C41, Bag Rack. ITEM NO.
C43 CARBONATOR
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C44 SOILED DISHTABLE
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To include: 01 Work surface 34" AFF. 02 Stainless steel construction. 03 1" high inverted "V" edge at soiled dish drop-off. 04 Splash where adjacent to walls. 05 Scupper drain per details. 06 Pre-rinse sink per details. 07 Die stamped scrap chute per detail. 08 Open structure base. 09 Parking space in base for trash can. 10 Undershelf where unobstructed. 11 Flanged foot where required by the contract documents. 12 Double slant rack shelf, table mounted, per details. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Component Hardware, model KL53-1000-BR, splash mount, pre-rinse assembly with wall bracket. 02 Component Hardware, model KL40-3400, mounting kit. 03 Component Hardware, model J92-5000 scrap block. 04 Component Hardware, model E32-4900, flat strainer drain. D Special instructions: 01 Install pre-rinse assembly with mounting kit above pre-rinse sink per drawings. 02 Install scrap block into top per details. 03 Anchor dishtable to floor. ITEM NO.
C45 COOKING OIL SYSTEM
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
C46 DISHWASHER W/ BOOSTER
A One (1) - Champion, model DH-5000T, high temperature machine.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 27 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B To Include: 01 Direction of operation per drawing. 02 Extended wash tank chamber. 03 Stainless steel frame, legs and feet. 04 Stainless steel front and side panels. 05 Single point electrical connection for dishwasher and booster heater. 06 Regulated electric heat (5.2 KW). 07 Built-in booster heater for 70°F. water temperature rise. 08 Automatic tank fill. 09 Common drain connection. 10 Water pressure reducing valve. 11 Water hammer arrestor. 12 Factory installed drain water tempering kit. 13 Vent fan control for interlocking operation of exhaust fan. 14 Two (2) year parts and labor warranty from date of start-up. Warranty to include round trip drive time to jobsite. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Vollrath dish racks as follows; a Four (4) model 52672 dish racks b Two (2) model 52671 flatware racks c Two (2) model 52669 pan racks D Special Instructions: 01 Provide start-up inspection service by factory authorized service agent. ITEM NO.
C47 CONDENSATE HOOD
A One (1) - Fabricated, exhaust only, condensate canopy per drawings and details. Hood 3'-6" wide x 3'-6" long x 2'-6" high. B To include: 01 Type 304 stainless steel construction. 02 Condensate baffle. 03 Perimeter gutter. 04 Accessories required for installation. C Special instructions: 01 Hang with ½" dia. steel hanger rods and turn buckles. Provide required structural members to suspend hood from overhead structure. 02 Set hood bottom edge 6'-8" AFF. ITEM NO.
C48 CLEAN DISHTABLE & POT SINK
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To Include: 01 34" high to work surface. 02 Stainless steel construction. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 28 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Splash where adjacent to walls. Three (3) 24" x 26" x 14" deep sink compartments. Depth from rolled rim. Drainboards. Open structure base. Undershelf where unobstructed. 14 ga. stainless steel hat channel bracket, below top, for mounting hose reel. 14 ga. stainless steel bracket, below top, for mounting hose reel mixing valve. Flanged foot where required by contract documents.
C Ancillary Equipment: 01 Component Hardware rail shelf. Construct with the following parts: a Three (3) model J19-4960 wall brackets. b Three (3) model 1" O.D. 16 ga. stainless steel rails with welded capped ends. 02 12" high x 8'- 0" long 16 ga. stainless steel panel on wall behind shelf. 03 Two (2) Component Hardware, model KL34-8014, splash mount, faucet with 14" swing spout. 04 Two (2) Component Hardware, model KL40-3400, mounting kit. 05 Component Hardware, model KHR-1015-OSS, open body, stainless steel hose reel assembly. 06 Component Hardware, model K50-X198, polished chrome, vacuum breaker. 07 Component Hardware, model KL43-4050-1 mixing valve. 08 Three (3) Component Hardware, model DSS-8015, lever drain assembly. D Special Instructions: 01 Mount rail shelf 21" above rolled rim of sink. 02 Install faucet with mounting kit per drawings. 03 Mount mixing valve below top. 04 Mount hose reel below top per drawing. 05 Anchor to floor. ITEM NO.
C49 PAN RACK
A One (1) - Eagle Group, Quik-Set solid embossed shelving unit. B To Include: 01 Five (5) model HDS 24" x 42" 16 ga. stainless steel embossed shelves. 02 Four (4) model HDSCP74-S 74" stainless steel posts. Modify post height to 72". 03 Four (4) model CAHW4-SB 5" dia. polymer tired casters, two (2) with brakes. C Special Instructions: 01 Set bottom shelf 10" AFF and space other shelves equally. ITEM NO.
C50 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
C51 JANITOR'S SHELF
A One (1) lot - Eagle Group, "QuadTruss" with"EAGLEgard" epoxy finish. Free standing section with five (5) shelves and four (4) 86" posts.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 29 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B Sections: 01 Two (2) 14" x 36". C Special Instructions: 01 Set bottom shelf 10" AFF and all others 17" O.C. ITEM NO.
C52 WALL SHELF W/ MOP HANGERS
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model USO830-16/3 MOD. B To Include: 01 16 ga. type 304 stainless steel construction. 02 Wall brackets welded to shelf. 03 Three (3) mop hangers. 04 Two (2) hooks. C Special Instructions: 01 Set shelf bottom edge 72" AFF.
ADD ALTERNATE - 2 Bar Items No. B01 through B31.
BAR
ITEM NO.
B01 STORAGE SHELF
A One (1) lot - Eagle Group, "QuadTruss" with"EAGLEgard" epoxy finish. Free standing section with five (5) shelves and four (4) 86" posts. B Sections: 01 Two (2) 21" x 42". C Special Instructions: 01 Set bottom shelf 10" AFF and all others 17" O.C. ITEM NO.
B02 REFRIGERATOR
A Two (2) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B03 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
B04 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
B05 NUMBER NOT USED
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 30 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
B06 BAG RACK
A Two (2) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B07 WALL SHELF
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To Include: 01 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, fully welded, wall mounted shelf on cantilever brackets. C Section: 01 One (1) 18" x 60" D Special Instructions: 01 Coordinate mounting height of shelf with Item No. B06, Bag Rack. ITEM NO.
B08 CARBONATOR
A Three (3) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B09 LOCKING STORAGE SHELF
A Two (2) - Eagle Group, model CSC2448E, mobile security unit with"EAGLEgard" epoxy finish. One (1) not shown. B Each section to include: 01 Four (4) 24" x 48" shelves 02 Four (4) 63" posts 03 5" dia. swivel casters with polyurethane tires. Front casters with brakes. C Special Instructions: 01 Shelves equally spaced. ITEM NO.
B10 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
B11 ICE MAKER W/ TRANSPORT CART
A One (1) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B12 BOTTLE COOLER
A Two (2) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B13 BACK-BAR
A One (1) - By Division 06.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 31 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
B14 REFRIGERATED PASS-THRU BACK-BAR
A One (1) - Glastender, model PT84H, pass-thru, self-contained. B To include: 01 No finish top. 02 Stainless steel finish on front. 03 Glass doors with stainless steel trim. 04 Black vinyl finish on sides. 05 Stainless steel interior finish. 06 Hinge doors per drawing. 07 Door locks. 08 Compressor location per drawing. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 14 ga. stainless steel, channel shaped, 4" high toe base, per details. Set base in continuous bead of clear silicone sealant at floor. D Special Instructions: 01 Restrain excess cord length. 02 Coordinate finished height of toe base with Millwork Contractor and construction of Item No. B13, Back Bar. 03 Install under Item No. B13, Back-Bar. Coordinate installation with Millwork Contractor. ITEM NO.
B15 BAR
A One (1) - By Division 06. ITEM NO.
B16 CASHIER'S STAND
A Three (3) - Glastender, model PCB-24 . B To include: 01 Hinge door per drawings. ITEM NO.
B17 CASH REGISTER
A Three (3) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B18 MUG CHILLER
A Two (2) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B19 BAR STATION
A One (1) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B20 NUMBER NOT USED
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 32 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
B21 SPEED GUN
A Three (3) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B22 GLASS WASHER
A One (1) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B23 CORNER FILLER SECTION
A Two (2) - Glastender, model C-IFC-24/24 . B To include: 01 Stainless steel leg set. ITEM NO.
B24 KEG COOLER
A One (1) - Perlick, model DDS84, self-contained. B To include: 01 Stainless steel finish front sides and top. 02 Stainless steel solid doors. 03 Stainless steel interior floor pan. 04 Hinge doors per drawing. 05 Door locks. 06 Two (2), stainless steel, Tee Tower Style Dispensing Kits. Each tower to consist of dispensing head, drainer and four (4) faucets with black handles. 07 Compressor location per drawing. C Ancillary Equipment: 01 14 ga. stainless steel, channel shaped, 4" high toe base, per details. Set base in continuous bead of clear silicone sealant at floor. D Special Instructions: 01 Include parts, accessories, and fittings for complete installation of Tee Towers. 02 Tapping equipment by Owner. 03 Coordinate finished height of toe base with Millwork Contractor and construction of Item No. B15, Bar. 04 Install under Item No. B15 Bar. ITEM NO.
B25 HAND WASH / GLASS RACK STATION
A One (1) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed. ITEM NO.
B26 BAR STATION
A One (1) - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 33 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
B27 ICE & BEVERAGE DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B28 BEVERAGE TABLE
A One (1) - Eagle Group, model TSE-BS MODIFIED, size and shape per drawings. B To include: 01 Work surface 34" AFF. 02 14 ga., type 304, stainless steel top with square edges. 03 6" high splash where adjacent to walls. 04 Open structure stainless steel base. 05 18 ga., type 304 stainless steel undershelf. 06 Fully weld open structure base and undershelves. C Special instructions: 01 Brace top to support counter mounted equipment. ITEM NO.
B29 COFFEE MAKER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
B30 NUMBER NOT USED
ITEM NO.
B31 ICED TEA BREWER
A One (1) - By Owner.
DRINK STATION
ITEM NO.
DS01 BAG RACK
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
DS02 WALL SHELF
A One (1) - Fabricated, size and shape per drawings and details. B To Include: 01 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, fully welded, wall mounted shelf on cantilever brackets. C Section: 01 One (1) 18" x 30" D Special Instructions: 01 Coordinate mounting height of shelf with Item No. DS01, Bag Rack. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 34 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
DS03 CARBONATOR
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
DS04 BEVERAGE COUNTER
A One (1) - By Division 06. ITEM NO.
DS05 ICED TEA DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
DS06 ICE & CARBONATED BEVERAGE DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
DS07 CUP DISPENSER
A Two (2) - Dispense-Rite, model CTC-R-4SS. B To Include: 01 Stainless steel finish. 02 Counter top mount. C Special Instructions: 01 Verify Owner's cup size(s). 02 Install on Item No. DS04, Beverage Counter. ITEM NO.
DS08 COFFEE MAKER
A One (1) - By Owner. ITEM NO.
DS09 CONDIMENT DISPENSER
A One (1) - By Owner.
2.14 A
APPROVED ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS The following list of manufacturers are approved as alternates to equipment items specified. Alternate or Substituted equipment must comply with Article 1.6 Substitutions in this Section.
ITEM NO.
C02
WALK-IN SHELVING
A. InterMetro
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 35 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C03
STORAGE SHELVING
A. InterMetro ITEM NO.
C04
VEGETABLE PREPARATION TABLE
A. Advance Tabco ITEM NO.
C05
FREEZER
A. True Food Service Equipment ITEM NO.
C06
MOBILE SLICER STAND
A. Advance Tabco ITEM NO.
C07
SLICER
C09
MOBILE RANGE
A. Globe ITEM NO.
A. Blodgett Range ITEM NO.
C10
SALAMANDER BROILER
A. Blodgett Range ITEM NO.
C11
MOBILE CHAR-BROILER
A. MagiKitch'n ITEM NO.
C12
MOBILE GRIDDLE
A. Lang Manufacturing ITEM NO.
C13
MOBILE REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT STAND
A. True Food Service Equipment ITEM NO.
C14
MOBILE FRYER W/ FILTER
A. Frymaster Corporation ITEM NO.
C17
MOBILE CONVECTION OVEN
A. Lang Manufacturing
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 36 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C18
COOLING RACK
A. Carter Hoffmann ITEM NO.
C21
WORK TABLE
A. Advance Tabco ITEM NO.
C22
MICROWAVE OVEN
C23
CONVEYOR TOASTER
A. ACP,Inc. ITEM NO.
A. APW /Wyott ITEM NO.
C24
DRAWER WARMER
A. APW /Wyott ITEM NO.
C25 CHEF'S TABLE
A. Advance Tabco ITEM NO.
C26
MOBILE REFRIGERATED SANDWICH UNIT
A. True Food Service Equipment ITEM NO.
C28
HEAT STRIP
A. APW /Wyott ITEM NO.
C29 BACK-UP COUNTER
A. Advance Tabco ITEM NO.
C33
REFRIGERATED DISPLAY CASE
A. RPI Industries ITEM NO.
C42
WALL SHELF
A. Eagle Products ITEM NO.
C46
DISHWASHER W/ BOOSTER HEATER
A. Hobart
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 37 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
ITEM NO.
C49
PAN RACK
A. Market Forge ITEM NO.
C51
JANITOR'S SHELF
A. InterMetro ITEM NO.
B01
STORAGE SHELVING
A. InterMetro ITEM NO.
B07
WALL SHELF
A. Eagle Products ITEM NO.
B09
LOCKING STORAGE SHELF
A. InterMetro ITEM NO.
B14
PAN RACK
A. Perlick Corporation ITEM NO.
B16
CASHIER'S STAND
A. Perlick Corporation ITEM NO.
B23
CORNER FILLER SECTION
A. Perlick Corporation ITEM NO.
B24
KEG COOLER
A. Glastender ITEM NO.
B28
BEVERAGE TABLE
A. Advance Tabco
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 A.
DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION Supervision: Provide a competent foreman or supervisor who shall remain on the job during all phases of installation. Foreman shall have the technical expertise to oversee erection of equipment and coordinate with other trades regarding connections, installation and inspections.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 38 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
B.
Delivery: Coordinate with progress of construction and schedule of Owner's operation. The following procedures apply unless instructed and documented by Owner or General Contractor: 01 Deliver Foodsevice Equipment in factory fabricated containers designed to protect equipment and finish until final installation. 02 Field-Assembled Fixed Equipment: delivered to the job-site when directed by the General Contractor and installed/protected accordingly. 03 All other Fixed Equipment: delivered after completion of work on finished ceilings, lighting, finished floor and wall systems, including painting. 04 Movable Equipment: delivered to inventory in secured area for job-site storage or when fixed equipment installation and clean-up has been completed.
C.
Installation: Performed by technicians skilled in field welding, finishing and adjustment of equipment to fit field conditions in accordance with best standards of the industry. 01 Assemble, square, level and make ready for final utilities connections. 02 Provide sanitary conditions when cutting around obstructions. 03 Smoothly apply sealant at all equipment splashes adjacent to walls and other equipment. Apply General Electric construction sealant Series SE-1200 silicone mastic (clear color). Insert backer rod at 1/8" gaps or as required. Mask both sides of gap before applying sealant and remove excess for a neat application. When gaps exceed 1/4", install 18 gauge stainless steel trim molding of proper shape with concealed attachment. Use epoxy cement or "zee" clips to secure stainless steel trim. Radius exposed corners and smooth edges of trim. 04 Comply with NSF and local health department requirements when anchoring equipment to floor. All anchoring methods must allow easy cleaning of equipment. Install stainless steel acorn head nuts on exposed bolt threads. Provide stainless steel bolts or screws with pan shaped heads. Reduce gaps to a minimum and seal.
D.
Protection of Work: 01 Fabricated fixtures: Adhere fiberboard or twin wall corrugated board to tops and exposed body panels/components. 02 Manufactured Equipment: Adhere fiberboard or twin wall corrugated board to equipment as required by shape and installation requirements. 03 Damaged Equipment: document and submit to Owner recommendation of action for repair or replacement. Detail impact on Project Schedule and any changes to the Contract Amount.
3. 2
CLEAN AND ADJUST
A.
Clean up and remove all debris from the job site, resulting from work as installation progresses.
B.
Thoroughly clean and polish (interior/exterior) all Foodservice Equipment ready for use, prior to demonstration and final observation.
C.
Lubricate and adjust drawer slides, hinges, casters.
D.
Adjust pressure regulating valves, timed-delay relays, thermostatic controls, temperature sensors, exhaust hood grilles, etc.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 39 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
E.
Clean or replace faucet aerators, line strainers.
F.
Touch-up damage to painted finishes.
G.
Start up and check operation of all refrigeration systems for at least 72 hours prior to acceptance.
3. 3
EQUIPMENT START-UP/DEMONSTRATION
A.
Test, adjust and regulate equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Certify in writing to the Owner that the installation, adjustments and performance are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Provide Owner or Foodservice Operators with a thorough operational demonstration of all equipment. Give instruction in the care and maintenance of equipment. Coordinate the scheduling of selected equipment items with attendees and Owner at least two weeks in advance of demonstration periods.
3. 4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Submit three (3) sets bound in hardback, three-ring binders (quantity per Contract Documents) at completion of installation.
B.
Manual Format: 01 Cover labeled with manual title and project name. 02 Provide Table of Contents listing equipment item number, equipment description and manufacture. Equipment not requiring operating, parts or maintenance manuals need not be included. 03 Provide a tab divider for each manufacture of equipment provided on this project. Divider to include manufacture's name, operation, maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment of same manufacture. Place equipment item number, as indicated in the contract documents, on corresponding equipment manuals.
C.
Manual to include a list of equipment and its respective local service agent (within 50 miles of project site), indicating address, telephone number, E-mail address, web site address and name of person to contact. Service agencies selected shall be factory-authorized for equipment assigned.
D.
Manual to include equipment manufacturer's operating/maintenance instructions, replacement parts data and price lists. Include assemblies and components built into other equipment. Provide name and address of each respective manufacturer to be contacted for spare or replacement parts after Warranty period. Manufacturer’s info is to include Tech Services telephone number, email, and web site address.
E.
Provide video tapes and/or CD’s for maintenance, training, operation, etc, where available from the manufacturer.
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 40 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
3. 5
FINAL OBSERVATION
A.
Final observation will be made when the Contractor has certified that he has completed his work, reviewed the installation/ operation of each item and found it to be in compliance with the Construction Documents.
B.
Repetitive final observations incurred due to the Contractor's failure to comply with requirements of this Article may be invoiced to this Contractor at Consultant's standard hourly rates.
END OF SECTION
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
114000 - 41 April 4, 2016 100% Construction Documents
SECTION 123661 SIMULATED STONE SURFACES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid‐surfacing material for countertops and splashes. 2. Solid‐surfacing material window stools and aprons. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Section 064023 “Plastic‐Laminate‐Clad Architectural Cabinets” for base cabinets supporting simulated stone countertops. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. B. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing solid surfacing countertops and splashes, build mockup including splashes and typical integral sink or lavatory, if applicable, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination”. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver solid surfacing stools and aprons until painting and similar operations that could damage solid surfacing material have been completed in installation areas. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where solid surfacing stools and aprons are to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress SIMULATED STONE SURFACES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
123661 ‐ 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support solid surfacing material countertops by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for of quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B.
Wood Products: As substrates for window stools. Comply with the following:
1.
2. 3.
2.2 A.
B.
2.3
Medium‐Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M‐2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire‐retardant‐treated softwood lumber, kiln‐dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous‐metal or hot‐dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed‐steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled‐in‐place anchors. SOLID‐SURFACING MATERIAL WINDOW STOOLS AND APRONS
A.
Material: Material and Color indicated in Finish Legend and Room Finish Schedule.
B.
Countertops and Splashes:
1.
C.
Window Stools and Aprons, Details: 1. 2. 3.
Thickness: 2 cm.
Thickness: 2 cm. Projection: 1 inch from face of wall, 1 inch return beyond jambs. Edge Detail: Square face with arris on all edges and along return to wall.
SIMULATED STONE SURFACES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
123661 ‐ 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Glue: Aliphatic‐resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
B.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1.
Use adhesive that has a VOC content of less than 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installing solid surfacing material countertops examine shop‐fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 A.
INSTALLATION Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut stools and aprons to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. Exercise care not to chip or crack edges of plastic laminate.
1.
3.3 A.
B.
Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Repair damaged and defective solid surfacing material stools and aprons, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace damaged stools or aprons. Clean all exposed and semiexposed surfaces using material recommended by solid surfacing manufacturer. END OF SECTION 123661
SIMULATED STONE SURFACES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
123661 ‐ 3 April 4, 2016 Construction Documents
SECTION 133423 FABRICATED STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section includes prefabricated wood gazebo. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. 1.3
Structural Performance: Control booths shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and snow and wind loads to comply with local building codes and standards. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For shelters with factory-applied color finishes.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Warranty: Sample of special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior grade.
FABRICATED STRUCTURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
133423 - 1 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
B. 2.2
Dimension Lumber: Western red cedar. PREFABRICATED WOOD GAZEBOS, GENERAL
A.
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components that form a completely assembled, prefabricated wood gazebo, ready for installation on Project site. 1.
2.3
Building Style: Standard square corners.
PREFABRICATED STEEL CONTROL BOOTHS A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cedarshed or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bidding. 1. 2. 3.
Model 1015ASP Size: 10 by 15 feet. Wall Height: 7 feet.
B.
Structural Framework: Western red cedar.
C.
Base/Floor Assembly: 2 inch thick western red cedar plank on 2 by 4 inch western red cedar framing.
D.
Wall Panel Assembly: Prefabricated western red cedar wood panels.
E.
Hip Roof Assembly: Consisting of exterior western red cedar roof panels, and western red cedar shingles.
F.
Doors: Prehung wood door and frame. 1. 2.
G.
Windows: Prebricated western red cedar frames with fixed glazing. 1.
H. 2.4
Material: Western red cedar. Glazing: Fixed unit with 6-mm-thick, clear tempered float glass.
Glazing: Fixed unit with 6-mm-thick, clear tempered float glass.
Hardware: Provide all necessary hardware for doors and for attaching walls. FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate gazebo panels and components completely in factory, ready for assembly at site.
B.
Preglaze windows and doors at factory.
C.
Accessible Control Booths: Where indicated to be accessible, fabricate control booths as follows:
FABRICATED STRUCTURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
133423 - 2 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
1. 2. 2.5
Provide door opening with minimum 32-inch clear width. Provide minimum 60-inch clear turning spacing within the gazebo.
FINISHES A.
Finish wood components completely at factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install gazebos according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Accessible Gazebo: Install with interior floor surface at same elevation as adjacent paved surfaces, or provide accessible ramp.
C.
Set gazebo plumb and aligned. Level baseplates true to plane with full bearing on concrete bases.
D.
Fasten gazebo securely to concrete bases with expansion anchors.
E.
Connect electrical power service to power distribution system.
F.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
G.
After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 133423
FABRICATED STRUCTURES WRD Renovation Will Rogers Downs, Claremore, OK
133423 - 3 April 4 2016 Construction Documents
